EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide

Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C

Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2

Date February 2003 February 2003

Pages 1-594 595-643

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. ACE, DBACCESS, DIALOG, DMRS, EE CMS, EE Power, EE Raceway, EE Schematic, EE Wiring Diagram, IGDS, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
 1984-2003 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... wway_spec ................... panel ............................................ rcp .............................................................................................. to_equip .............................................. mscodelist .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... tray_spec ........................................................................................................................................................................................ drop_point ...................................................................................................... mscolumns ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... light_fixture .......................... ee_unique ............................................... drop_point ........... vendor .................................................................................................... cndsch_spec .................................................................................................................................... to_support ......... mscatalog .................................. tl_type .................................................. ol_type ....................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code .......... wway_part ................................................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_insul ........................................................... envelope ....................................................................................... manual_part ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ee_yes_no .............................................................................................................................. project ................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_size ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_units ............................................................................................. Table of Contents 459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491 13 ................ ee_pseudo_cable ...................................................... ee_cond_x_area ............................................................................................. drawing ........... drawing_type .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_config ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... rcp_type .......... tl_subtype ............................................................................................................................................. cabsch_spec ............... ee_system ..................................................................................................... drawing ...................................................................... cond_spec ..................................................... ee_pcbl_color ........................... one_line ...................................................................................................... pullbox ................................................................................................. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .................................................................................................................... tl_qual .. ee_graphic_only ........................................... tl_fit_env ......... tray_part ................................................................._ _______________ cond_part ........................................... duct_spec ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

................dat ............................................. Appendix F: EE File Structure ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... report.................... Available Fittings ......................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ............................................................................................................. EE Raceway File Structure ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ........................................................................................ print..................................... one_line ......................................................................................................................................... Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ........................... rcp ..................................................................................................................................................... str_to_sys .... Symbol Processor File .................................................................................. 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ envelope ........ rcp_to_sys ................................ Update Reference Schema ....................................................................... ee_system ........ manager..........................................................................................................................................................................................................dat ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14 ........................_ _______________ duct_fill ......................................................... Sample .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... rcp_to_drw ............................................................... process................ mscatalog ................................................................... mscolumns ...................................................................................... Appendix D: Specification ...........................................................dat .................................................................................................................................................................................... fit_to_sys ..................................................... project ................................................dat ................................................................. fitting ...................................... panel ......................................................................................................unl Files .................................................................. to_support ................................dat ......................................................................................................................................................................... eden..........dat .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... panel_to_drw ............................................................................................................................ EE Nucleus File Structure ................................................................ rule_chk..................................................................... straight .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. sys_to_drw ........................................................................................................................ ol_to_sys ...........................................

Associated Software/Files ...................................................................................................................................cmd ..................................... Drop Table Form ................................................... Information Output: ................................................................................................... Appendix J: Reports .............................................................................................................................................................. Schema File Form ........................................................................... Information Output: .............. Appendix I: rway............... Alter Schema Form ...... Associated Software/Files ............................................................................................. Project Drawing List (drwlst) .................... Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) ................................................................................................................................................................. Create Table Form ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... RIS Report Processing ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) .................. Create Schema Form ............................................................ Drop Schema Form .................................... Data Definition Form ...................................................................... Set Form .................................................... Information Output: ........................................................................................................ Table Information Form .................................................................................................. Associated Software/Files ..........................................cmd file ....................... Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) .................................................................................................. 15 ................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume ..................................................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) ...................................................................................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Alter Table Form ........................................................................................................................................................ Information Output: ............ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager ................. Information Output: .................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias................................... Associated Software/Files ...........................

..................................................... 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ............................................................................................................................................ 16 ............._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File .............................................................................. Appendix N: EE Configure ............................................................................................ Glossary ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. EE Manager .............. Index .......................... Database Edit Functions .............................................................................................................

Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. Our web address is: http://www. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. please call your local Intergraph office._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast.com/ppo/services/support.com. and direction. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U. If you are outside the United States. If you are outside of the United States.S. please call your local Intergraph office. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information.asp. convenient. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph. services.A. 17 .S.S.com. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.intergraph. Alabama 35758 U.com.intergraph.intergraph. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.

Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed._ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. let us know. AL 35758 18 .

Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. you should be familiar with a text editor. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. 19 . This document is designed as a reference. Oracle. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. these include Informix. modify. and Ingres. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. Also. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. a glossary. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. appendices. Currently. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. grouped according to function._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. and an index. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. numbered sections. such as vi or EMACS.

Provides special notices to the customer. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative. For a fixes release. Lists any exceptions made to the certification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . forms. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. Describe the product environment. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. 20 . Describes the graphics environment for the product. Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Provides installation instructions. File Name readme. menus. and on-line Help. For international locations. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. This includes information on the screen display.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document.

For example. phrases.dat to load the ASCII file. For example. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. Key in original.rpt file. or groups of related information. For example. Bold Indicates a command name. For example. which requires an action be taken by the user. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. For example. or dialog box title. parameter name. Choose File > Open to load a new file. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. The text is placed in the viewing plane. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. 21 . Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. The ASCII report is stored in the layout.

Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. which map menu selections to key combinations. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. Need a hint — used with activities and labs.February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 22 . Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. To press the Escape key. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. then K.

To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. In addition. For example. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. Select the line string to define the graphic template. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. After selecting an item. Selecting does not initiate an action._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. To key a character string into a text box. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. Click Apply to save the changes. For example. In a dialog box.dat from the list box. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. For example. Double-click on the file original. right-button chord. For example. you would select items to define parameters. such as selecting toggle buttons. you click the action you want to affect the item. Select the file original. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession.dat to load it into the new surface. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 24 .

25 . modify. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes._ _______________ 1. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. Introduction 1. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product. These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .

On-line Informix. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. Oracle. EMACS. or Notepad. The software covered includes baseline and application software. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. all projects have been archived. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . 2. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader._ _______________ 2. or Ingres. You must be familiar with a text editor. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. and EE Raceway Modeling. such as vi. If you are updating. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix.

A database can reside locally on each workstation. followed by the EE application products. the workstation as server. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. Based on these two setups. — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. you should load system nucleus software. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. First. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and the server-client workstation. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). Additionally. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. 28 . For the purposes of this installation. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. or remotely on a server.

The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. 4. This may be a networked drive. Once you know what application software you need. or it may be on your local system. company. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. and serial number (as delivered). Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. Double-click on setup. First. This will invoke the product selection form. 29 . including a valid serial number. This form expects your user name. Download/Install 3. Installation Procedure 2._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. 1. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. 2. based on your system configuration.

If local is selected. client.February 2003 5. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. select OK. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. select Load Components. If server is selected. Place an X next to the software you wish to install.) If client is selected.) When all information has been provided. you must provide the installation path. you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. and a local path to the icon associated with the software. 30 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software. Among other installation options that vary according to product. When all software to be loaded has been selected. as well as path to the software on the server. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. A message box will appear. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. or server).

the EENUC (Common) program group will be created.txt. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 . and not to a previously-selected file. Download/Install 8. Set your user environment variables.) 7. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. When the software has successfully loaded.cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. This program group contains the EE Manager. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form.cfg file. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. you must set the environment variables in your ee. 2. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software. EE Configure. Before executing the software. EE Help. EE Readme. otherwise select No. (Your login directory will be fine. you will modify this copied file. 9.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. Copy the ee. Before you can enter the EE environment. 6. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. and EE Nucleus icons.

To modify the value of that variable. This will close the EE Configure utility. 32 . and no more changes are needed. select OK to save the modifications to the ee. then select Set._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . key the desired value into the Value field.cfg file. This displays the current value and description for that variable.February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set. After all variables have been set properly for your environment.

In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. 3. 2. Databases 2. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. Create empty RIS schemas. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. Download/Install 33 . Also.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. 1. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. Also. What follows is a very basic outline. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. and 202 for reference schema. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. 4. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas.

34 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide. The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas.February 2003 5. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. Update your project and reference schemas.

When you key in EE._ _______________ 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. the Project Menu displays: 3. 35 . click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create. All EE drawings are organized by project.

select another option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Options List .lists available project and design files Input/Output Area .February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons . and then to select. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes.for keying in or displaying data about a project. To turn off an active option. If you do not know the appropriate addresses. The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list. check with your system manager. 36 .a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. Message Area . or key in. Listing Area . To edit information you key in to input fields.control the EE form. use standard EMACS commands.displays messages from the software. These options can display additional forms or menus.

you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. For example._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. and executes the active process. 37 . 3. all of the available listings are currently displayed. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. and then select Confirm (√). Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. When a particular option is active. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. provide the necessary input. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. When listings fill more than one page.

Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 38 . Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects.February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager. Delete — Deletes EE project files. if there are more than one.

2. 3. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. which itself can span multiple products. For information about creating a project schema. The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. see RIS Schema Manager.prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. page 553 . Select Confirm (√) to create the project. Multiple files can exist within a single project. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. Select the Project name field. and key in the new project name. Create 3. Select Create from the Project Menu option list. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. Steps 1. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. 39 . so you are not required to key in this extension._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. A .

and the schema passwords. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. the project and reference schemas. You may also key project names into this field.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name. You will need to input the names of the project. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered. if one has been defined. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. if they exist. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. 40 . Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB.

3. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu._ _______________ Steps 1. 2. You can make modifications to these fields. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. — OR — Select the Project name field. The project listing displays. and key in the password. 4. For information about schema passwords. If no password was defined for the schemas. see RIS Schema Manager. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. page 553 . EE Environment 41 . leave these fields blank. Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. 3. The EE Product Menu displays. and key in a project name. if needed. Select Confirm (√). Select a project from the listing area.

Steps 1. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . In this example. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu. The Design Menu displays. only the EE Raceway product is on menu. available for use.) 42 . If only one EE product exists on your workstation. Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation.

3. and key in a project to be copied. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. and key in the new project name. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. 43 . this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. 4. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. Select a project to be copied from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list)._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. EE Environment Steps 1. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. 2. 3. Select the Copy project to input field.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. — OR — Select the Project name field. 44 .February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. If a database exists in the project directory. 3. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted. Select the project name from the listing area. and key in the project name. 2. Select Confirm (√).

EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project. 3. a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. 45 . see RIS Schema Manager. If a database does not exist in the project directory. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. page 553 . For information about dropping a schema. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function.

Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project. The path must exist on the remote node. The project name is appended to this path._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 46 . Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project. A password is required if you are using the TCP option.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk.

using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. Select the Project name from the scrolling area. Default values for the remote node name. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s .EErc file. 4.EErc file._ _______________ Steps 1. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. (If you need more information about the . 2. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. Archive 3. EE_USERNAME. user name. EE Environment 47 . Select the storage facility for your project files.) When archiving using a floppy disk. contact your system administrator. — OR — Select the Project name field. 3. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. and key in a project name. and EE_REMDIR. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle.

Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. When restoring from a network. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. When restoring from a floppy.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. 48 . you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. A password is required if you use the TCP option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process.

Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. 2. EE Environment 49 . When restoring from a floppy disk. 3. you must have the disk in the disk drive. 4. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. and key in a project name. Restore 3. Select the Project name field. Indicate the storage location for your project. Select Restore from the Project Menu. Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring._ _______________ Steps 1.

The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 .February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes.

you must have an existing database and user name. RIS Schema Manager. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. and maintain project and reference database schemas. 51 . For more information. 2. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. To access the RIS Schema Manager form. page 553 . With this utility you can create. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. Before using this utility. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. Steps 1. drop. see RIS Schema Manager. RIS schema utilities 3.

You can update the schema with multiple products. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. if one exists. page 425 . Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. set the toggle to Echo. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. To enter the schema name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To enter the password. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. see EE Databases. Schema password — Defines the schema password. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. 52 . Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. To display the schema password input. For additional information about updating schemas. though doing so will slow processing time. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input.

. select the field. Background. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. EE Environment 1. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. 3.msg). Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process.. page 64 . The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. 53 . When Update project schema finishes processing. Set up the form to meet your specifications. For more information about operating modes. The update process displays the message Processing . To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. and key in the full pathname for those files. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. see Process. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. 4.EErc file. and key in the desired filenames. the system displays a processing message file (create_db.EErc file. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . Update Project Schema Steps 3.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Return to step 1. To change the displayed default files. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. The Update project schema form displays: 2. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). or Batch._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox.

5. 54 . page 89 . located in the current project’s /tmp directory. For more information. the system displays an error message file (create_db. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form. You can also access these message files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process.err). using the Output option on the Utilities form. see Output.

EErc file. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. and key in the desired filenames. To enter information. select the field. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. page 64 . or Batch. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. select the field. EE Environment 55 . To change the displayed default files. You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. see EE Databases.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. if one exists. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. though doing so will slow processing time. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . 3. page 425 . You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. and key in the full pathname for those files. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. For more information about operating modes. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. Schema password — Define the schema password. select the field. For additional information about updating schemas. Background. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. To enter information.EErc file. see Process. You can update the schema with multiple products. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. set the toggle to Echo. To display the schema password input.

Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. 4. — If the schema is updated without errors. Return to step 1. The update process displays the message Processing .February 2003 Steps 1. — OR — — If errors occur during the update process.err). 56 .. it will display one of two message files. When Update reference schema finishes processing. 2. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters.. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. Set up the form to meet your specifications._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. 3. The Update reference schema form displays. the system displays an error message file (create_db.msg).

_ _______________

Update Reference Schema

You can also access these message files, located in the current project’s /tmp directory, using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information, see Output, page 89 . 5. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.

3. EE Environment

57

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

58

_ _______________
4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment
When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu, one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu, if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu, page 42 for more information). — OR —

Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment

The EE Raceway Design Menu.

4. EERWAY Environment

The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. If you are a new user, you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options.

Commands
The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. Create — Allows you to create a design file.

59

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design, rule, report, and message files.

60

_ _______________
Create
This option creates design files, based on a specified seed file.

Create

When you create a drawing, you are actually copying a seed file (a template). The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed.dgn) and English seed file (seed.dgn). You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment.

4. EERWAY Environment

Steps
1. Select Create from the Design Menu. If there is only one seed file, it is displayed as the default. If there is more than one seed file available, the listing area displays all these files. By default, the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. 2. Select the seed file. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. 3. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and, optionally, a file extension.

61

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 A file extension of .dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension. 4. Select Confirm (√). The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.

62

_ _______________
Design
This option accesses the graphics environment, taking you into a specified existing design file.

Design

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Design from the Design Menu. Select the drawing name from the listing area. Select Confirm (√). The system invokes the graphics environment. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process.

4. EERWAY Environment

63

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Process
This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database.

Overview
This section provides general information about running all processes. See Raceway Processes, page 331 for more information about individual processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.

64

_ _______________
When you enter a specific process, an input screen displays.

Process

You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. You can override default values by keying in your own information. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. An asterisk (*), when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field, is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. For example, if you enter a*, all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to execute the process.

Operating Modes
The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. The default mode is Foreground, but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. A process in Foreground runs immediately, and you do not regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. A process in Background runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

4. EERWAY Environment

65

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Entering Time in Batch Mode
If you select Batch mode, an input box displays, allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. The time can be entered as 1, 2 or 4 digits. One- and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours, four digits to be hours and minutes. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The suffix AM or PM may be appended; otherwise, a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The system also recognizes the names NOON, MIDNIGHT, NOW and NEXT. Optionally, you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. If you input no date, the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour, and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. Legitimate commands include:

0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Process from the Design Menu. Select a process from the listing area. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option.

66

_ _______________
EDEN
The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden.dat file.

EDEN

Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights, fittings, and special parts.

This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. For detailed information about individual Eden options, see Eden Processes, page 347 .

4. EERWAY Environment

67

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)), an input screen displays.

You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. If necessary, you can override the default values that already display, and key in your own information. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to begin the option process.

Operating Modes
A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. The default mode is foreground. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground, background, and batch. An option in foreground mode runs immediately, and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. An option in background mode runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

68

NOW and NEXT are also recognized._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. If you input no date. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. MIDNIGHT. it will run the job TOMORROW. otherwise. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. it will run the job TODAY. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. The special names NOON. EERWAY Environment 69 . and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute).and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. 2 or 4 digits. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. an input box displays. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. four digits to be hours and minutes. One. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4.

dat file (win32app\eerway\data)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must load the project database before running any reports. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases. See Reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. 70 .

select the output file box and key in a new name. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. Select a report from the listing area. Select Report from the Design Menu. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. you should name the output files yourself. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report._ _______________ When you process a report. Steps 1. 2. an input screen displays. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. 3. 4. To change the output filename. the new file will overwrite that file. You can change the name of the output file or error file. EERWAY Environment 71 .

February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. 72 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For instance. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction.

dat file in win32app\eerway\data. see Reports. page 545 . EERWAY Environment 73 . Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. For more detailed information about each rule check. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. 4._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.

Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. Steps 1. If you want to save reports throughout a project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. you should name the output files yourself. Select Rule from the Design Menu. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. 74 . You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. the new file will destroy the previously created file. or change that information according to your specifications. Select a rule check report from the listing area.February 2003 When you process a rule check. 2. an input screen displays. 3.

When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. 4. 75 . the Drawing Utility Menu displays._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns. All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. Each column will list a different subdirectory.

Send — Sends a file to a network node.chk) . Steps 1.February 2003 Drawing (. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. screen.All report files generated by rule checks reports. 76 . Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. Enter necessary form information for the active option. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file. or plotter._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (. Output — Outputs a file to a printer. (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (.rpt) .All files output by Raceway processes.All report files generated by standard reports. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option. (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging). and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. Receive — Receives a file from a network node. 3. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. Rename — Renames a file.dgn) .All drawings. Copy — Copies a file.tmp) . Select Utilities from the Design Menu. 2.

_ _______________ 4. EERWAY Environment 77 . Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option. Utilities 4.

78 . You must specify a unique filename for the destination file.dgn. key in a unique destination file name into this field. elect a file from the list.rpt. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied. and so forth) to the new file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or key in the name of the file to be copied.February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file. . Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called. Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (.

To physically remove the file from the workstation. you must select the Purge option._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them. 4. EERWAY Environment 79 . but can be undeleted (that is. Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space.

you cannot undelete them with this option.February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 80 . Once you have removed files using Purge.

or no files at all. EERWAY Environment 81 . 4. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. selected files that have been deleted. Once you Purge a file. To de-select a selected file._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. you cannot recover it. place a data point on it. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them.

You can select the file from the list. 82 .February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file. and so forth) to the new filename. It does not automatically append a file extension (. or key the name into this field. . Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dgn.rpt. Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename.

or key in the appropriate name. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. Otherwise. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. You can either select the desired file from the list. The password may or may not be visible in the field. 4. test1. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system.dgn). Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. turn on the IGDS toggle. the setting should be No IGDS. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. EERWAY Environment 83 .

Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. including its extension. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. specify the local path to the file. The password may or may not be visible in the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. You can either select the desired file from the list. 84 . Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. or key in the appropriate name. Also. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. Be sure to specify the complete filename.

rpt. EERWAY Environment 85 . chk._ _______________ Local path (dgn. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received. Receive 4.

Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. page 46 . see the description of Archive in Archive. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. 86 .February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. see the description of Restore in Restore. 87 . page 48 ._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. Restore Field Descriptions 4. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active.

February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. The password may or may not be visible in the field. 88 . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

dat) controls the available output options. for example – are not allowed. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. If you do not specify an output destination. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. IPLOT commands. screen. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer. plotter. or laser printer. Field Descriptions 4. 89 . Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device. or select it from the list. Local commands._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. NQS options.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 90 .

the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. EERWAY Graphics 91 . You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. 5._ _______________ 5. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file. By default. data button <D>.

February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views. page 63 ). 92 . Initializes RIS with the reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen.

as described in the previous section. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. MicroStation Command Window . To select an action. release the data button. your screen display may be different.cmds file.) 1. 93 . Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below.displays a list of window actions. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5. When the correct item highlights. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button .

— System Prompt Field . All your design work occurs in the screen working area. 2. 94 .moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type. — Command Status Field ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .displays elements as you place them.provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design. 3. Working Area . The number and name of each view appears in the window title area.contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment. Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes. — Key-In Field .displays startup file information and product name. Windows . Command Menu Bar .displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard.displays a system prompt that directs you through a command. — Current Command Field .displays the name of the current active command.February 2003 — Sink Box . 4.

moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy. Minimize .provide ways to manipulate windows. Screen Display 5. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window. Move Arrows .appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border. EERWAY Graphics 95 . To select an action from the menu. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor. the window is restored to its previous size and location.enlarges a window to its maximum size.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor.appear when the cursor is placed over the window border. Restore . If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size.collapses a window. Vertical Arrows . When the correct item highlights._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Move .provide ways to move and resize windows. Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. Maximize Button .restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Close .displays a list of window actions. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. Maximize . Minimize Button . the window is restored to its previous size and location.appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border. Resize Borders .moves a window around the workspace. Window Menu Button . Lower .enlarges a window to its maximum size.deletes a window. If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size.collapses a window. Press and hold the data button to move the window. Size . Horizontal Arrows . Diagonal Arrows . release the data button.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners.

Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks. and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command.Invokes the EERWAY command palette. For instance. which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands. selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu.Invokes the Integrated Commands menu.Invokes the Bar Commands palette.Removes all palettes that have been invoked. 96 . Bar Commands . when applicable. Integrated Commands .February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window. you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. Exit . Compress Design . which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette .Executes the File Design command. Remove Palettes . To select a keyword. place the cursor over the button and press <D>. Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword.

Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. EERWAY Graphics 97 . Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. 5. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu.

98 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section.February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. then selecting Palette.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. 5. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 99 . then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.

then selecting Palette. 100 . then selecting Modify Group Commands.February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.

EERWAY Graphics 101 ._ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. 5. then selecting Palette. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window.

Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 102 . then selecting Palette.

To identify an element. When you are moving an element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. EERWAY Graphics 103 . Identifying Elements 5. place a data point on it. press <D> again to accept the element. In many commands. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. If the correct element highlights. the wrong element may highlight. or shape you place is called an element. press <R> to reject that element. The system then highlights another element._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. For example. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. The system highlights the element. line. If the wrong element highlights. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations.

The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins. The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. called MU:SU:PU. you are not limited to using only them. if a user-created cell library is being used. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. are established based on the project type (metric or English). Therefore. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. You may set your working units to any desired value. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries.) 104 . EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. If using this cell library. you can often use data points. also known as MU:SU:PU. Subunits. 1 foot) SU — Subunit. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. and Positional Units._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the working units of measurement. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need.

_ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. There are several ways to key in precision points. For example. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard. key in its absolute x and y coordinates.1:6. 105 . 5. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed. direction) To place a precision point.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. For example. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in DI=0:10.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. key in DX=1:6. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point.0. as described below: DI=(distance.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 106 .

and running reports and processes on the file. as an operator would typically use it. Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6._ _______________ 6. 107 . Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. page 415 . creating a raceway model. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. This includes setting up the design file.

EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways. The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 .February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. On the right are the same elements after propagation. These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways. This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). In general._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. For additional system manager information. using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command)._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes. Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. specifications. for example). 109 . page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file.

page 262 for more information. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. Then. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. page 258 for more information. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. page 295 for more information. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. you can change the default symbology settings for them. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. Then. page 260 for more information. If you need systems not available to you. See Define System. page 294 for more information. You can change the active system throughout the design session. See Symbology Control. page 264 for more information. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. See Define One-Line Type. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. See Set Active One-Line Type. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. See Set Active System. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. 110 . Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. See Set Symbology Control.

As you place one-line segments. 111 . Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. page 289 for more information._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. See Propagation Setup. you should review the active propagation parameters. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. page 297 for more information. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. what one-lines will be propagated. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command.

A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 132 . you can continue placing one-lines. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. a phantom run disappears. When you accept the run. placing tentative segments. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. If not accepted. and the Precision Input form. See Design Commands. The following figure displays the parts of a run. and Precision Input Form. it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). page 119 for more information on these commands. To draw a raceway. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. page 147 . initially in phantom mode. page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. Place Manual Fitting. Once you place and accept a run. 112 . An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways).February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. regardless of type. See Place One-Line.

see Propagate Element. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. you can define the fitting through Eden. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. Eden: In Eden mode. If you require mitred elbows for production. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. All special fittings (conduit bodies. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. Once found. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. 113 . extension. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. Sketch: In sketch mode. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. pullboxes. so reference database access is not required. For example. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. unusual angles. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. For example. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. see Place Manual Fitting. First. page 147 for more information. page 194 for more information. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. use the Propagate command. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. or fitting-to-fitting placement. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. Second. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. for example). For example. Propagation 6.

114 . You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. the one-line elements remain in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). see Error Messages.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. To highlight errors that occur during propagation. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. For a detailed description of these error messages. regardless of the active propagation mode. page 377 . see Highlight Propagation Errors. definition. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. the propagation mode must be set to sketch. and specification. page 314 . Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow.

can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. and title blocks. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. using the annotation forms. The project database is normally created when the project is created. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. one-lines. page 178 ). three-lines. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. one-lines._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. supplied by the reference database. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. For the purposes of this discussion. and title blocks. The default annotation information. three-lines. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. For title blocks. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. three-lines. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. Once the project database is loaded. 115 . The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. (The system manager may customize these values. one-lines. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. Databases 6.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. the default can be unique for each title block cell.

and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database.) are stored. 116 . A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database. The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a distinction is now made between schema and database. three-lines. etc.

there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. Workflow Currently. You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. see Reports. These reports run on the project and reference databases. page 545 . For more detailed information about the individual reports. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. 117 ._ _______________ Reports Reports 6. page 59 for general information about running reports.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task. 118 . This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). See Create Interference Envelope (default name). However. page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process.February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software.

Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. When you select a command from the menu. Precision Input Form 7. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. See System/Application Manager Information. the form displays the active command name as its title. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. For each command. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. Specify an absolute coordinate to move. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. 119 . a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences._ _______________ 7.

The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. Cancel Terminates the active command. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. In most cases. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. To change the displayed working view. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. select the field. and prompts the system to continue to the next step.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . while collapsing the precision input form. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>. 120 . Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt. In most cases. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. It can also reset a current command action by one step.

you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. Both options accept key-in for distance. For example. Using Move. 121 . The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. by selecting North and keying in 20. Using Move To. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. 7. and direction. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. by selecting North and keying in 20. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. For example.

February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. 122 . you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below. lower center. Three justification points are available: lower left. Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement. and lower right._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . By using the justification point and the height and width option described below.

7. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. Precision Input 123 . The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. you can route segments nonorthogonally. If you do select Accept. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. When you identify a one-line. Activate the Any Point option. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. When you select the command. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. 2. The command highlights the identified segment. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. In Construct Point mode. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint.

— OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2.February 2003 4. and select Accept. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. 124 . the command still calculates the point from the endpoint. moving in the direction of the segment. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 5. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter.

you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. the Full/Half toggle displays. Using the toggle. You cannot use this command to place a first point. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. or any distance you key in. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification). Precision Input 125 . Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. When you select the Distance button. 7. Using the toggle. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. the Full/Half toggle displays. When you select the command. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. When you select the Distance button. The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. When you select the Height or Width buttons. When you select the Height or Width buttons. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. The distance displays at the bottom of the form._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify.

126 .The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed. The Distance and Direction form displays. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form.These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined. Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance .February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. 2. Negative values are acceptable. Steps 1.Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees. Move ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point. Angles .These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. 3. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Move to .

and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. 4. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. If counterclockwise. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. If clockwise. See Runtime Setup Commands. 7. page 287 for more information on the available commands. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. modify. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees)._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. This option is set in the PDS product. 127 . The default setting is clockwise. The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 128 .

change the active design parameters. drop points. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. Design 129 . Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. raceway connect points (RCPs). then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. rotate cross sections. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements._ _______________ 8. and size conduit and duct banks. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. circle. 8. manual fittings. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. and right cylinder.

February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 130 . Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line. Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment.

page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. 8. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. 131 . Likewise. you can use these commands throughout the design session. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. page 119 . See Setup Commands. see Precision Input Form.

one-line type. or when you place a fitting. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. is new. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. based on every possible combination of routing options. 132 . or specifications of a one-line. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. you can resume routing an existing one-line. and so forth). Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. raceway parameters. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. one-line type. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. unattached to another element. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. you can attach to an existing RCP. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. and annotation of the original one-line. These two segments will retain the systems. then connect will not be an option. you can connect to an existing one-line. conduit. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point.

attach. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. or continue. or continue. the command will not allow the continue option. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. Design 133 . then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. attach. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. If the beginning or termination action is break. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. If the beginning or termination action is break. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. 8. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. then the command places a new RCP by default. though it is not a recommended practice.

page 119. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. Steps 1. Using the form. Data Point Accepts. reset a command action. 2. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and return to step 2. page 287 . see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 4. In addition. Select the Place One-Line command. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. Complete the routing. prompting you to Enter first data point. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. accept input. you can locate elements. and exit a command.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. 3. reject input. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. 134 . page 256 )._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. The Place One-Line precision input form displays. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands.

the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. For detailed information about precision input. If the RCP does not have a fitting. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. see Precision Input Form. If the RCP has a fitting on it. reject input. circle. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. circle. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. you can locate elements. route one-lines. or part of a cell. The arc. such as an elbow. and exit a command. 8. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. 135 . or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. accept input. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. page 119.

The precision input form displays. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. 136 . or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. 4. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. 2. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. 5. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP.February 2003 Steps 1. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. the closest. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. circle. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. You cannot key in a negative value. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Select the Route Around Vessel command. the route can be placed to the vessel.

Design 137 . The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel._ _______________ 6. Route Around Vessel 8. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). 7. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel.

reset a command action. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. At any point during this operating sequence.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). The Insert RCP precision input form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. see Precision Input Form. reject input. the system displays the message Element not found. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. page 119. Steps 1. Using the form. accept input. route one-lines. The system highlights a valid one-line. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 138 . For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 2.

4. — OR — If you reject the one-line. — OR — Exit the command. Insert RCP 8. Continue inserting RCPs. If you accept the one-line. Go to Step 2._ _______________ 3. Design 139 . Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to identify another. Go to Step 2. the command inserts the RCP as specified.

Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. If you identified a duct bank cross section. and exit a command. go to step 4. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 140 . At any point during this operating sequence. but changes the duct bank justification location. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. Otherwise continue to step 3. see Set Raceway Defaults.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. page 256 for more information. page 119. accept input. 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For duct bank cross sections. reject input.

the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 4. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. 8._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. See Set Raceway Defaults. 3. Repeat this step. If Automatic Propagation is on. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. Data Point Accepts. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. Design 141 . The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle.

142 . reset a command action. route one-lines. for instance. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. If you do not locate an acceptable element. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. 2. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. You can. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. Select the Place Drop Point command. The system highlights a valid RCP. For detailed information about precision input. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. For example. the system displays the message Element not found. and exit a command. Using the form.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. reject input. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. page 119. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Steps 1.

and returns you to the previous prompt. The system prompts you to identify another RCP. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. Go to step 2. The system highlights the identified one-line. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. — OR — Reject the one-line. Place Drop Point 8. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. Go to step 4. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file._ _______________ 3. Design 143 . The system places the drop point as specified. 4. Go to step 2. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. 5.

At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. Using the form. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. 144 . Steps 1. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. page 119. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. reset a command action. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. the system displays the message Element not found. accept input. 2. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The system highlights a valid RCP. 3. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. route one-lines.

see Precision Input Form. Using the form. Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. accept input. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. page 119. Select the Define Active Point command. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Steps 8. 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The command makes the specified data point the active point. Design 1. 145 ._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. and exits the command. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action.

active systems. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exit a command. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. The command exits automatically. 146 . reset a command action. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. you can locate elements. Using the form. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. reject input. Select the Set Active Parameters command. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. system. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. The system highlights the identified element. 3. 2. For detailed information about precision input. one-line type.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. Return to step 2. Steps 1. route one-lines. The system sets the active one-line type. and raceway parameters. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input.

_ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. vertical tees. and so forth) using this command. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. When placing a straight section. unusual angles. Place Manual Fitting 8. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). Otherwise. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. Design 147 . then the system places the new fitting by itself. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. or fitting-to-fitting placement. During placement. pullboxes. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. For example. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting.

Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. See Set Active Parameters. 148 . etc. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. etc. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. See Set Active System._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 145 . select a value from the list. page 146 . Otherwise. inside vertical. select a value from the list. select a value from the list. To change the displayed subtype. and active one-line type parameters in the design. See Set Active One-Line Type. the command derives the orientation from the place point. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. wye. straight. If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. page 295 . etc. horizontal. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. rigid. To change the displayed qualifier. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. See Define Active Point. page 294 .) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. To change the displayed three-line type.) for that specification. the previous orientation will be retained. one-line type. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value.

— OR — Change any of the values for Type. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. select a value from the list. If straight is not your active Type. and Qualifier._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Subtype. (if applicable) Spec2. select a value from the list. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. Subtype. The list contains all available specifications. and key in the new value. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. select the field. Qualifier. To change the displayed specification. Design 149 . Part — Displays the active part. To change the displayed part. and key in the new value. Doing so displays a specification form. You can only review the values in this field. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. Subtype. To change the displayed angle. key in a negative angle. select the corresponding Display button. Spec1. select an angle from the list or select the field. To change the displayed length. 8. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. The list contains available angles. or Angle (if applicable). the Length field does not display on the form. To display the specification itself. and Qualifier for the current specification.

Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. displays. Override . See Spec1 for a description of the form. then the column value has an associated codelist. if any. If an * displays in the List column. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. select the *. Subtype. which automatically activates it. If more than one row matches the criteria. If Cutback Mode is off. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. the existing RCP location is fixed. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. containing all matching rows._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select .Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If only one row matches this criteria. Column value . You can only review the information in this column. List . To display the codelist. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. You can review and modify the values in this column. then a second form. To change a value. If Cutback Mode is on. and key in a new value. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings.February 2003 Column name . 150 . You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. the RCP will be moved accordingly. see Annotate Element. Type. Then select the field.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. for the given Spec1. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. and Qualifier.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. Doing so displays a specification form. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. page 178 . For a list of valid operators. To change the active placepoint. select the slide bar. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. select the Override button. Clear . Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing.

About .) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. and key in a new value. and toggle between the three axes (Primary.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. the Place Manual Fitting form displays. Design 151 . select the field. Secondary. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. To change the displayed axis. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting. 8. Angle . If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. then the largest fitting available is used. select the field. To change the displayed angle. then that fitting is used.

then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. material to feraloy.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. you set the active Table to cond_body. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. see the descriptions earlier in this section. In other words. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. vendor to 3. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. made of feraloy from vendor 3. regardless of the other attribute settings. size. and size to 1/2 inch. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. For example. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. and vendor to 3. will be displayed in the size list. and vendor display as the active attributes. Similarly. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. select a table name from the list. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. if you set material to feraloy. if you set type to form 7c. When set to All. material. type. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. 152 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the active special part table.

Select the Place Manual Fitting command. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. On the other hand. Go to step 4. etc. Change fitting descriptions._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. you should first consider a few points. orientation. radius. Such fittings are called special parts. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. Design Steps 1. For more information. see Precision Input Form. 2. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. orientations. 3. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. height. 4. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. 153 . — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. and location.) to construct the three-line symbols. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. page 119 . Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width.

February 2003 5. Continue placing manual fittings. — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 154 .

Conduit Sizing 8. Design 155 ._ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator is a wild card. This operator is a wild card. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias. To display the code list. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. If an * displays in the column. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. select the *. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. representing zero or more characters. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. If you do not enter another operator. representing a single character. 156 . Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. the system assumes =. then the Value has an associated code list. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value.

Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. If more than one cable matches the search criteria. Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit.When a conduit is calculated to be full. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. — Increase/Decrease size ._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields.The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. the PseudoCable form displays. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units. 8. the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . it is added to the conduit. Design 157 .

You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. 3. and exit a command. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. page 119. 4. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. 2. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can locate elements. reset a command action. reject input. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. At any point during this operating sequence. Select the Conduit Sizing command. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. page 268 for more information. route one-lines. Define the cables for the conduit. Steps 1. 158 . accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays.

a warning message displays. Design 159 ._ _______________ 5. Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit. Field Descriptions 8. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made.

Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. reject input. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. 2. The vertex is inserted. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. Using the form. you can locate elements. page 192 for more information. see Move One-Line Vertex. 160 . accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. use the Move One-Line Vertex command.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. To move an inserted vertex. At any point during this operating sequence. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. 3. If Automatic Propagation is on. The selected one-line highlights. and exit a command.

This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. To change the value. For example. When on. the value is displayed in the design. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. 161 . field route length. select the field and key in a new length. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. This field is informational only.) When set to Keyin. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. Similarly. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. To change the displayed length. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. select the field and key in the new value. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line.

) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Using the form. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and key in a new value. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. you are prompted for the first point (that is. select the field. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . sum of the x. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. reset a command action. To change the displayed length. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. placement point) of the one-line element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. page 119. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. y. Secondary. To change the displayed angle. reject input. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. select the field. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. To change the displayed axis. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. and key in a new value. select the field. For detailed information about precision input. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. and exit a command. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. you can locate elements. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. 162 . see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence.

Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. Design 163 ._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. 2. 3. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. — OR — Exit the command. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. The precision input form displays.

The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. By assigning a conduit. you assign that area in the duct bank. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. cable or gap to a button. Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 164 . All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section.

Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. 8. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. Design 165 . Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. page 256 for more information. If conduit routing is selected. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. cable or gap to a matrix button. Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. If cable routing is selected. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. See Set Raceway Defaults. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project.

Using the form. accept input. both width and height. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 4. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. any changes you made will be ignored. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. reject input. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. Define cross section layout using the various commands. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. At any point during this operating sequence. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can define a margin width. is assigned to the duct one-line. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. Likewise. 166 . a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. all conduit/cable information. 3. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. and exit a command. See Set Raceway Defaults. The duct bank section layout. page 256 for more information. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you select Cancel on the warning form. page 119. route one-lines. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. see Precision Input Form. The precision input form displays. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. If Automatic Propagation is on. you can locate elements.

Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. See Set Active One-Line Type. See Define Duct Cross Section. page 164 . page 289 . See Define One-Line Type. The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. page 260 . See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 268 . You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. 8. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. vendor. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. units. page 294 . You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. 167 ._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available.

conduit/cable) to manipulate. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification.February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. 168 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection. this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment.

2. The identified element highlights. Go to Step 9. Go to Step 2. 169 . The Place Stub Up form displays. — OR — Select the Change Association option. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. Go to Step 2. 5. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. The precision input form displays. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. Select the Place Stub Up command. Go to Step 4._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Exit the option. 3. Go to Step 14. Select the Select Duct Segment option. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. 4. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. Steps 8. Go to Step 6.

170 . 12. Select the Delete Stub Up option. Go to Step 10. The identified element highlights. — OR — Exit the option. annotation. Go to Step 7. is displays in the form message field. — OR — Exit the option. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Select stub up for modification. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. 7. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The precision input form displays.February 2003 6. Go to Step 2. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Go to Step 7. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. It also deletes all cross sections. 10. 8._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to Step 2. propagated elements. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line. The identified element highlights. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. Select the Change Association option. 9. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 11. The precision input form displays.

Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 171 . — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. 17. Go to Step 2. Select the Place Stub Up option. 15. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Select location to place stub up. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. 14. Select location to place stub up. 13. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. displays in the message field. Stub up spec. Steps 8. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 17. 16. has been changed. displays in the message field. Go to Step 2. — OR — Select a option button. The precision input form displays. Design Go to Step 14.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

9. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. annotating. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. one-lines. and three-lines. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. within the design file. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. three-lines. then selecting Palette. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. and propagation. 173 . Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group._ _______________ 9. deleting. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. such as RCPs. annotation. moving. and so forth). Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. Available element manipulations include copying.

Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. For reliable results.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). you can use these commands throughout the design session. Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. See Setup Commands. any time you are modifying raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input. 174 . page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. not MicroStation manipulation commands. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. see Precision Input Form. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. page 119 . you should use these commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and delete specified elements. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. reviews. one-lines. copy. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Commands Annotate Element — Places. three-lines. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. including RCPs. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. and three-lines. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. You can use individual commands to move. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. then selecting Modify Element Commands. within the design file. 175 . to review or edit element annotation. 9. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. then selecting Palette. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. annotation. and so forth).

February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. and elements associated with it. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. from the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 176 . Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum.

9._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. For detailed information about precision input. See Setup Commands. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. annotation. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. three-lines. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. For reliable results. and so forth). you should use these commands. see Precision Input Form. any time you are modifying raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. 177 . Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. not MicroStation manipulation commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). page 119 . Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

Raceway Connect Points (RCP). Using this command. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. reviews. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. 178 . For straights and fittings. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. three-lines.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. By definition. and fittings. straights._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you are allowed only to review the annotation. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes.

To delete an override on a reference database attribute. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. the field remains null. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. and key in the new value. select the field. Otherwise. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. then the value derives from the design file. If Ref displays in the column. If an * displays in the List column. The next time you enter the annotation form. Where UD displays in the column. If Dgn displays in the column. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If you change a column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Modify 179 . Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. You can only review the Column name column information. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. enter nothing into the design. the Access column displays a R/W. where New had displayed. The key field is updated._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. it becomes an override key to the reference database. You can only review the information in this column. You can enter blank spaces into the design. the corresponding column value comes from user data. Once you have deleted the override. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. When modified. 9. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. select the *. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. You can review and modify the values in this field. then it will display an R. using your keyboard space bar. To change the values associated with the element. If you can only view (read) the column value. If blanks exist for a field. To display the codelist. Where the toggle is On. then the value derives from the reference database. the value is saved back to user data. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. the value will display in the design where you place it. Empty <Return>s. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. however. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form.

Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. the field remains null. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. the Default key is used. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. which automatically activates it. the key specified in the user element is used. You can only review the information in this field. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Once you place an override key on an element. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. 180 . select the row you want. If you select Cancel (X). the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Otherwise. To change the displayed value. you can modify it. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. select the field. If more than one row matches the criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. but cannot delete it. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. If no key exists in the user element. and then select Confirm (√). and key in a new value. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form.

This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. the system assumes =. This operator is a wild card. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. page 119. 181 . This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. representing zero or more characters. you can locate elements. If you do not enter another operator. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. representing a single character. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. and exit a command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This operator is a wild card. see Precision Input Form. reject input. reset a command action.

Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. The message disappears when you identify a valid element.February 2003 Steps 1. return to Step 2. The new value displays in the design file. 6. Return to step 2. drop point. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. 3. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. This step repeats for each new value. 4. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. 2. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. When there are no more values to place. Select the Annotate Element command. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. equipment pointer. The Annotate Element precision input form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 182 . and place a data point. reset <R> to skip. — OR — Exit the command. or RCP). — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. 5. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The system highlights the specified element. three-line. the system displays the message Element not found. Return to Step 2. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. Position the column value.

When you load the project database. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements. these values are loaded into the project database. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. Modify 183 ._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. optionally. Field Descriptions 9. displayed. When you annotate any raceway element.

reject input. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 184 . you can locate elements. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. Select the Copy Element command. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. the system displays the message Element not found. Repeat this step. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. Return to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 9._ _______________ Steps 1. 3. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Modify 185 . 2. The Copy Element precision input form displays. Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. Steps The system highlights the specified element.

you can locate elements. three-line fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. and equipment pointers will also be moved. If a one-line is moved. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. At any point during this operating sequence. three-line fittings. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. 186 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. and annotation.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. drop points. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. equipment pointers. reject input. and equipment pointers will also be moved. page 119. All associated annotation. accept input. If an RCP is moved. All associated annotation. You can use this command to move one-lines. Using the form. RCPs.

The Move Element precision input form displays. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Select the Move Element command. Modify 187 . 9. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Repeat this step. The system moves the element to the specified location. Return to Step 2._ _______________ Steps 1. the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. 3. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 2. Steps The system highlights the specified element.

You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. 188 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. route one-lines. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input.

Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. 2. Modify 189 . Select the Clone Element command. If you are placing more than one clone. 3. 5. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element. The clone elements are placed in the design file. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. Steps 9. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. 4. Return to step 2. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. The element highlights._ _______________ Steps 1.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 190 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. page 119. reject input. see Precision Input Form. Also. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input. reset a command action. route one-lines.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. the attached RCP will also move. At any point during this operating sequence.

Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. page 297 for more information on this toggle. Repeat this step. See Propagation Setup. The selected one-line segment highlights. The system moves the segment to the specified location. Modify 191 . the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. 3. Steps 9. 2. Select the Move One-Line Segment command._ _______________ Steps 1. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move.

reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. page 119. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. Steps 1. also move with the vertex. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. along with any annotation. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The selected vertex highlights. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . equipment pointers. the attached RCP. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 192 . reject input. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 2. accept input. If a one-line end vertex is moved. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex.

_ _______________ 3. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Move One-Line Vertex 9. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. page 297 for more information on this toggle. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. See Propagation Setup. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. Modify 193 . Repeat this step.

page 119. reject input.err file. reset a command action. All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. page 297 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. To view errors that occur during propagation. A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. This command displays to the screen the pro. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed. For information about the form. 194 . route one-lines. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. see Propagation Setup. see Highlight Propagation Errors. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. page 314 . Using the form.

195 . Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. page 507 . For information about this table. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. 2. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Select the Propagate Element command. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP._ _______________ Steps 1. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. 3. see Specification. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. Fittings 9. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. Go to step 1. Go to step 2. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the command. the system displays the message Element not found. The Project Run precision input form displays.

February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Modify 197 ._ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9.

To change the displayed qualifier. rigid. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. and Qualifier for the current specification. horizontal. select a value from the list. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. inside vertical. The list contains available angles. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. To change the displayed subtype.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification.) for that specification. You can only review the values in this field. wye. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 198 . straight. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. page 214 . Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. etc. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. select an angle from the list or select the field. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. and key in the new value. To change the displayed three-line type. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. To change the displayed angle. Subtype. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. select a value from the list. etc. etc. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. select a value from the list. See Remove RCP.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable.

Qualifier. — Column value . select the corresponding Display button. Part — Displays the active part. and Qualifier._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). Spec1. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. select the field. You can only review the information in this column. the Length field does not display on the form. key in a negative angle. You can review and modify the values in this column. Then select the field. Subtype. and (if applicable) Spec2. To change the displayed specification. If straight is not your active Type. The list contains all available parts for the current specification.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. To change a value. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. The list contains all available specifications. select the Override button. 199 . and key in the new value. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. select a value from the list. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . To change the displayed part. To change the displayed length. and key in a new value.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. 9. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Subtype. You can also change any of the values for Type. select a value from the list. To display the specification itself.

That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. — Select . If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. if any. To display the codelist. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. If an * displays in the List column. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. select the *.February 2003 — List . Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. which automatically activates it. then that fitting is used. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. for the given Spec1. If more than one row matches the criteria. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. See Spec1 for a description of the form. Type. For a list of valid operators.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . page 178 . If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. To change the active placepoint. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. If only one row matches this criteria. Doing so displays a specification form. select the slide bar. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. and Qualifier. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. — Clear . The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then the column value has an associated codelist. see Annotate Element. Subtype. then the largest fitting available is used.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. — Override .Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist.

In other words. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. made of feraloy from vendor 3. To change the displayed angle. select a table name from the list. 9. and vendor display as the active attributes. type. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. select the field. and key in a new value.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. vendor to 3. if you set material to feraloy. Secondary. Similarly. material to feraloy. will be displayed in the size list. if you set type to form 7c. the form changes. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. size. you set the active Table to cond_body. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. and size to 1/2 inch. select the field. For example. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Modify 201 . The list contains the available special part tables from the database. material. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. — About . Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. and vendor to 3. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. To change the active special part table. To change the displayed axis._ _______________ — Angle .Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table.

you should first consider a few points. see the descriptions earlier in this section. etc. For more information. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters.) to construct the three-line symbols. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. When set to All. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. see Precision Input Form. Such fittings are called special parts.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. The list contains all available parts from the table. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. On the other hand. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. radius. page 119 . all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. select a part from the list. To change the active part. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. height. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . regardless of the other attribute settings.

Edit the fitting as needed. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database._ _______________ Steps 1. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. 3. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Select Confirm when finished. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Modify 203 . The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. 4. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. 2. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. Go to step 4. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. The dashed segment will then be modified. Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. the other segment appears as a dashed line. 2. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. Select the Modify One-Line command. If you do not locate an acceptable element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. reject input. and exit a command. the system displays the message Element not found.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. 204 . You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. Using the form. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. The system highlights a valid one-line. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. page 119. reset a command action. When identified.

Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. place a data point on the original one-line. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. 6. — OR — Reject the element. Modify 205 . prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. and return to step 2. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. To terminate the new routes. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. Data Point Accepts. Go to step 2. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. Repeat this step. Modify One-Line 9. The one-line highlights. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. 5. 4. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. Go to step 2._ _______________ 3. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified.

Accept the rotation and return to step 2. 206 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Continue rotating the cross section.February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. 7.

207 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define the rules in the reference database. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. then that fitting is used. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. route one-lines. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. page 119. then the largest fitting available is used. a LB fitting be placed. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. see Precision Input Form. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. Place Fitting by Rule 9. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. accept input. reject input. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. See EE Databases. For example. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. At any point during this operating sequence. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. Using the form._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database.

208 . displays. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. 2. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command.February 2003 Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

9. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. then the RCPs can be merged. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. Steps 1. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. If Invalid. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. If no coincident RCPs are found._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. 209 . Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. All RCPs must have a system in common. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. If Combinable. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined.

3.February 2003 2. 4. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. the one you selected. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. changes to Kept._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For each set of coincident RCPs. and the Status of the remaining RCP. The RCPs are combined. 210 . select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model.

211 . The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. If no duplicate one-lines are found. 4. Modify 3. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. 5. Select Cancel when finished. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. 9. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. 2. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs.

page 119. equipment pointers. and annotation. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. see Precision Input Form. reject input.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. you can locate elements. drop points. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 2. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. The system highlights the specified element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Delete Element precision input form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You can use this command to delete one-lines. cosmetic graphics. At any point during this operating sequence. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). 212 . and exit a command. reset a command action. route one-lines. accept input. the system displays the message Element not found.

the system deletes it. propagated fittings. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element. Return to step 2. 9. It also deletes all cross sections. Return to Step 2. Modify 213 . annotation. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. 3. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

page 119. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems. accept input. Once such an RCP is removed. 214 . reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. route one-lines. Using the form. You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. and exit a command. you can locate elements. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. For detailed information about precision input. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. If both onelines are annotated. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen._ _______________ Steps 1. The system highlights the specified element. If you accept the RCP. the system prompts you to identify another. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. Select the Remove RCP command. 2. 3. Go to Step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. Modify 215 . The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. If you reject the RCP. The Remove RCP precision input form displays. Remove RCP 9. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. 216 . Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. 3. Select the Delete Fitting command. 2. to delete. or the fitting’s RCP. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. This command does not remove the RCP.

see Precision Input Form. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. you can locate elements. 2. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. reset a command action._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify Steps 1. 9. page 119. The selected vertex highlights. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 217 .

Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one. Return to step 2.February 2003 3. If Automatic Propagation is on._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Return to step 2. the one-line repropagates. 218 . The vertex is removed.

reject input.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. and exit a command. 9. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. (See Propagation Setup. Using the form. accept input. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. route one-lines. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. the command will repropagate the one-line. If automatic propagation is toggled on. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. Modify 219 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. 3. 220 . Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The command prompts you to identify another one-line.February 2003 Steps 1. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. — OR — Reject the element. The system highlights a valid one-line. Go to step 2. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. Go to step 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). the system displays the message Element not found. 2.

Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. 221 . a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. 9. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Project Rules cannot be assigned. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. then the Project Rule can be assigned. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. When a row is selected. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. select the *. To clear the Project Rule. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. If an * displays in the List column. the system Percent and the Project Rule._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems.

Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. page 119. Steps 1. The precision input form displays. reject input. — OR — Exit the command. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. 222 . Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 5. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Change System Parameters command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The identified element highlights. At any point during this operating sequence. 4. Using the form. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. and exit a command. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. accept input. 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections.

Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. and delete elements of specified groups._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Annotate Element by Group — Places. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. annotation. three-lines. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. reviews. then selecting Palette. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Topics 9. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. and so forth). Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. copy. 223 . Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. and to review or edit element annotation.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. 224 . Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line.

three-lines. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. page 119 . Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. See Setup Commands. and so forth). you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can use these commands throughout the design session. annotation. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. 9. any time you are modifying raceway elements. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. 225 . Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. For detailed information about precision input. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. not MicroStation manipulation commands. you should use these commands. For reliable results. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. see Precision Input Form.

Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. To change the active group. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. In general. To enter a group name. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. select a group from the list. If the toggle is set to Single Element. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. 226 . All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. select the group name key-in field. The active group is highlighted in the list. however. and key in a name. using the Hilite option.

select an existing group from the Available Groups list. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. You must choose at least one element type when creating. and select Hilite. RCPs. the system automatically drops the entire group. To initiate the Drop operation. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. To initiate the Hilite action. Modify 227 . three-lines. If you remove all elements from a group. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. select a group from the Available Groups list. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). select Add to. To initiate the Drop from action. It is not necessary to select Accept. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. select Drop from. select Drop. drop points. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. select Copy. and select Accept. and all annotation. review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. Define Group To initiate the Add to operation. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. When processing is complete. When processing is complete. When processing is complete. and then select Accept. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. and key in a new group name. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. adding elements to. key in a group name. to equipment. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. or dropping elements from a group. Types include one-lines. and then select Accept. 9. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. and then select Accept._ _______________ To initiate the Create operation. select the button. To initiate the Copy action.

onelines. – System . You can select individual systems from this list.Displays a list of available one-line types. one-lines. and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. Once you have displayed the System list. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. three-lines. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form.Displays a list of available systems. – Attributes .Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes. only those element types (RCPs. EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. You can select individual one-line types from this list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list. 228 . three-lines. only those element types (RCPs. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. When you select a one-line type from this list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. When you select a system from this list. or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All).February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). – One-Line Type . Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list.

Define Group Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. – Fence Shape . – Fence Block . These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group._ _______________ When you select an element type from this list. – View . – All Elements . For example. Modify 229 . You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation. and select Fence Block from this list. or deletion from groups. Once you have defined the attributes. insertion into groups. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes.Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design. select the Accept button on the main form.Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. – Selection . 9.Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify. select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group.

The Groups form displays. — Use the EE Element Types. — OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. The group is created. Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. — Using the Graphic Method you defined. select your elements for the group. Select one of the group modification commands. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form. EE Method. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. Select the Define Group command. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. 2.February 2003 Steps 1. 230 . and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4.

using the Define Group command. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines. — If you have a fence in the design. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. A fence group overrides the active group. You must define a temporary group of elements. go to step 4. reset a command action. Using the form. and exit a command. you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Define Group. Copy Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Steps 1. reject input. 231 . Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. At any point during this operating sequence. 2. accept input. 9. the message No active group defined displays. Modify The Copy by Group precision input form displays. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command._ _______________ Copy Element by Group This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu. If you have not defined a group. go to step 3. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. go to step 2. page 226. page 119. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

If there are group elements that remain uncopied. Repeat this step. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 232 . the command exits automatically. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. — OR — Reject the active group. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. 5. The command exits automatically.February 2003 3. the command exits automatically. you are returned to step 3. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. Elements within the active group highlight. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Otherwise. the command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Otherwise. The system copies the element as specified. 6. 4. Otherwise.

To delete an override on a reference database attribute. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. You can enter blank spaces into the design. Modify Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. Annotate Element by Group 9. reviews. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. You can only review the Column name column information. You can review and modify the values in this field. Using this command. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). and fittings. using your keyboard space bar. three-lines. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). Empty <Return>s. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. and key in the new value. straights. select the column value field and delete the blank character. however. the field remains null. Once you have deleted the override. 233 . you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. Otherwise. enter nothing into the design._ _______________ Annotate Element by Group This command places. To change the values associated with the element. select the field. For straights and fittings.

but cannot delete it. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database.February 2003 If blanks exist for a field. If an * displays in the List column. Once you place an override key on an element. select the *. the field remains null. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. If you delete the value in this field. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. To change the displayed value. To display the codelist._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. If Dgn displays in the column. and key in a new value. then the value has been defined from the design file. If you can only view (read) the column value. then the value derives from the reference database. then it will display an R. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. the corresponding column value comes from user data. The key field is updated. the Access column displays a R/W. Where UD displays in the column. When modified. If you change a column value. the Default key is used. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. select the field. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. The next time you enter the annotation form. You can only review the information in this column. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. the key specified in the user element is used. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. the value will display in the design where you place it. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Otherwise. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. it becomes an override key to the reference database. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. 234 . then the column value has a corresponding codelist. If Ref displays in the column. If no key exists in the user element. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. you can modify it. Where the toggle is On. You can only review the information in this field. the value is saved back to user data. where New had displayed.

_ _______________ Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. 9. and then select Confirm (√). Annotate Element by Group From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. If more than one row matches the criteria. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. If you select Cancel (X). Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. which automatically activates it. Modify 235 . Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. select the row you want. For example. the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation.

page 226 . accept input. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. (For information about the command. and exit a command. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. using the Define Group command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. page 119. reset a command action. This operator is a wild card.) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. At any point during this operating sequence. representing a single character. This operator is a wild card. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. route one-lines. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. For detailed information about precision input. see Define Group. you can locate elements. If you do not enter another operator. 236 . reject input. You must define a temporary group of elements. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. see Precision Input Form. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. representing zero or more characters. A fence group overrides the active group. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. the system assumes =.

Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. go to step 3. 237 . The system highlights another group element. go to step 2. The system highlights the group contents. — If you have a fence in the design. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. — OR — Annotate Element by Group 9. — If there is not a fence in the design._ _______________ Steps 1. the command exits. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. 4. 3. reset <R> to skip. Go to step 1. The command exits automatically. 2. 5. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. Modify Reject the highlighted group element. Repeat this step. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. Go to Step 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. If no group elements remain. 6. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form.

The new value displays in the design file. optionally. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single. the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. When you load the project database. these values are loaded into the project database. the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. and place a data point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When there are no more values to place for the element type. the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. If you set the toggle to Global. Go to step 3. 238 . The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. displayed. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and. Go to step 3.February 2003 Position the column value.

Clone Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ Clone Element by Group This command copies the active group multiple times. page 226. — If you have a fence in the design. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. 2. 239 . Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. Steps 1. go to step 3. see Precision Input Form. Modify The Clone Group precision input form displays. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Define Group. page 119. the message No active group defined displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. At any point during this operating sequence. go to step 2. You must define a temporary group of elements. 9. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. Select the Clone Group command. you can locate elements. If you have not defined a group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. reject input. accept input. reset a command action. go to step 4. using the Define Group command.

February 2003 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group. 4. the command exits automatically. Repeat this step. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. The command exits automatically. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. — OR — Reject the active group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to step 6. 8. 5. If you are placing more than one clone. 7. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. The clone elements are placed in the design file. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. Return to step 2. Otherwise. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. 240 . 6. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. page 297 . using the Define Group command. see Define Group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines.err file. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Highlight Propagation Errors. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). You must define a temporary group of elements. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. For information about the form. This command displays to the screen the pro. page 194 . accept input. page 226. page 314 . reset a command action. go to step 4. For detailed information about precision input. see Propagation Setup. For information about using this command. go to step 3. The Project by Group precision input form displays. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. A fence group overrides the active group. — If you have a fence in the design. page 119. see Propagate Element. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. go to step 2. 241 . you can locate elements. and exit a command. Using the form. reject input. Modify Steps 1. 9. see Precision Input Form. To view errors that occur during propagation.

Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to step 1. — OR — Reject the active group. and then highlights another group element for propagation. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. go to step 3. The system propagates the element. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. The system propagates every element belonging to the group.February 2003 2. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. or until you exit the command. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element for propagation. 242 . — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 4. the command exits automatically. 3. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. If no group elements remain. and exits automatically. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. If no group elements remain for propagation. The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. the command exits automatically. or until you exit the command.

The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. You must define the rules in the reference database. For example. and exit a command. A fence group overrides the active group. 243 . Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. 9. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. See EE Databases. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. At any point during this operating sequence. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. route one-lines. then that fitting is used. Using the form. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Define Group. reset a command action. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. using the Define Group command. page 119. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. accept input. then the largest fitting available is used. reject input. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 226. For detailed information about precision input. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

Repeat this step. 3. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. the message No active group defined displays. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 4. — If you have a fence in the design. — OR — Reject the active group. If you have not defined a group. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. Otherwise. 2. The command exits automatically.February 2003 Steps 1. displays. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command exits automatically. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 244 . go to step 3. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. go to step 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied.

using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. see Define Group. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. 9. This command will not change the master system. The Add Systems form displays. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. For example. it will not be duplicated. The system(s) is added. Steps 1. It will only append systems to the element. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. Select the Add Systems Group command. the system defined at placement. Modify 245 . A fenced group will override the active temporary group. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. page 226 . 2.

The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Systems — Displays all the available systems. Project Rules cannot be assigned. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. While this button is depressed. For example. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. When a new active system is selected. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. 246 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. the subsystem are all unselected. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system. that is. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. If the Project Rule Set is not defined.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product.

— OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. The active group is changed to the new system type. see Define Group. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. 9. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. 3. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. Press <D> to accept the group. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. select the *. When defining the group for this command. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. To clear the Project Rule. Modify 2. one-lines. Steps 1. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. If an * displays in the List column. then the Project Rule can be assigned. When a row is selected. drop points. page 226 . Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. 247 . To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. The active group to be changed highlights. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). The Replace Systems form displays.

route one-lines.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. Using the form. see Define Group. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. you can locate elements. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. At any point during this operating sequence. You must define a temporary group of elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. and exit a command. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. 248 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If automatic propagation is toggled on. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. (See Propagation Setup. page 226. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. reset a command action.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. see Precision Input Form. page 119. using the Define Group command. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. For detailed information about precision input.

if any remain. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Steps 1. and the command exits automatically. Repeat this step. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. go to step 3. Repeat this step. the command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). Go to step 3. go to step 4. The command exits automatically. 2. — If you have a fence in the design. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. Modify 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 4. go to step 2. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. the command exits automatically. 9.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The command exits automatically. The command exits automatically. The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group.February 2003 Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the active group. 250 .

reset a command action._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. For detailed information about precision input. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. page 226. page 119. go to step 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. reject input. 2. Using the form. Steps 1. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. If you have not defined a group. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. the message No active group defined displays. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. and the command exits automatically. You must define a temporary group of elements. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and exit a command. route one-lines. Go to step 3. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 251 . see Define Group. go to step 3. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. using the Define Group command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. 9. you can locate elements. the contents of the group are deleted. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. go to step 4.

The system deletes all valid elements within the group. The system deletes the element. The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the active group. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. the command exits automatically. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. the command exits automatically.February 2003 The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 3. 252 . and prompts you to delete another group element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Repeat this step. The command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group.

report IDs. 10. Symbology Control — Defines. one-line types. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. review. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. working view. Set Text Defaults — Defines. Setup Commands In a new design file. RCPs. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. and modify the default parameters. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. Setup 253 . Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. reviews. and engineering units. reviews. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. and symbology settings for your design file. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. and modifies the default parameters for text. model annotation. and cross sections. text nodes. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. reviews. systems. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar._ _______________ 10. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands.

254 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file.

10. see the appropriate command descriptions. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control). For individual command prerequisites._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. Setup 255 . you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands.

define. and key in a new value. select the field. To change a displayed value. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. see Define Duct Cross Section. define. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. including cross section parameters. To change a displayed value. symbol defaults. see Define Duct Cross Section. such as Color or Active Angle. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. and key in a new value. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. To change a displayed value.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. between the routed cable/conduit. page 164 for more information. select the field. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. reviews. Margin Width — Defines the distance. define. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. and/or modify the settings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . in sub-units. You can review. and/or modify the values in these fields. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. page 164 for more information. represented by the matrix buttons. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. You can review. select the field. and key in a new value. and modifies raceway defaults. existing systems. 256 . and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. You can review.

2. To change a displayed value. select first the key field and then the Display button. Setup 257 . or drop point). 3. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. select the field. select the field. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. equipment pointer. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. You can review. and key in a new value. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. equipment pointer. and key in a new value. You can only view this data. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. and drop point annotation. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. select the slide bar. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. and/or modify the value in this field. Additionally._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. 10. and/or modify this key. To change the displayed value. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). The scale includes views 1 through 8. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. define. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. You can review. define. To change the current working view.

select the Select All button. so as to avoid duplication of elements. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. as well as those already selected for the current design file. Select the Define System command.February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . In order to place one-lines. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). you must have at least one system defined in the design file. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. If you need systems not available to you. 258 . To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. select the Clear All button. Steps 1. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. The System Definition form displays.

3. Define System 10. Setup 259 ._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). Caution should be used when adding these to the database. To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. Steps 1. select the Clear All button. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. 260 . If you need one-line types not available to you. Select the Define One-Line Type command. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type. as well as those already selected for the current design file. select the Select All button. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. so as to avoid duplication of elements. 2. The One Line Type Definition form displays. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file.

10. Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file._ _______________ 3. Setup 261 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

all symbology is taken from the system defaults. For more information. Therefore. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. see Symbology Control. When you enter a new design file. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). to make any changes in symbology. see Define System. page 258 and Define One-Line Type. page 260 . The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. page 264 . 262 . you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. For more information. those oneline types will use a system default. In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system.

— OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. 10. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. select the No Overrides button. 2. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Using your cursor. Select the Set Symbology Control command. 3. select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s)._ _______________ Steps 1. Setup 263 .

The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. page 262 for more information about this command). You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. select the field. select another one-line type from the list. select another system from the list. To change a value in the list. and key in a new value. and key in a system name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the displayed system. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. You can review and edit these settings. or select the field. One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. reviews. and key in the new value. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). or select the field. 264 . The display list contains a list of available systems. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines.

3. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Setup 265 ._ _______________ Steps 1. The Symbology Control form displays. Select the Symbology Control command. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Symbology Control 10. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 2.

and engineering units. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. 266 . select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. You will enter all values using the Text form. Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. or select a value from the list. To change the current text string justification. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). To change the current text node justification. reviews. and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). or select a value from the list. Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. text nodes.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list.

You can only review the displayed settings. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Sub units._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. 10. Setup 267 . The Text form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. 2. 3. Select the Set Text Defaults command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 268 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. Define which attributes to use. Steps 1. The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays. 2.

Setup 269 .cel. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. and modify the copied version. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. If you want to modify the delivered library. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. along with all existing cells. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. Create Cell Commands 10. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. in your cell library. copy it to a nonproduction directory._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. rway. The cells you create using this command are stored.

February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. For detailed information about precision input. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. To display a list of available cell libraries. see Precision Input Form. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. page 119 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 270 . Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

_ _______________
Create Model Cell
Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Create Model Cell

This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Model button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

10. Setup

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

271

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 10. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing sheet, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

272

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Model Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

273

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Create Equipment Pointer Cell
This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the To Equipment button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

274

_ _______________
6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

Create Equipment Pointer Cell

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing equipment tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip

10. Setup

For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

275

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

276

_ _______________
Create Drop Point Cell

Create Drop Point Cell

This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Drop Point button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point

10. Setup

Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. 5. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

277

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing drop point tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

278

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Drop Point Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

279

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Model Commands
These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file.

Commands
Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters, the defined systems, and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file.

Unlock Model — Unlocks the model.

Annotate Model — Adds, changes, or reviews the sheet name in a model.

280

_ _______________
Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands
You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. However, you can use these commands throughout the design session. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Using the Model Commands

Before Using These Commands
You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model, you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command.

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

10. Setup

281

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Lock Model
This command locks the model. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Therefore, you should lock your model after setup, but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Steps
1. Select the Lock Model command. The model is locked. If the model was locked when you selected this command, the message Model is already locked displays.

282

accept input. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. and exit a command. 2._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and place it. page 119. you can locate elements. 10. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. — OR — Exit the command. Select the Move Model Annotation command. Setup 283 . At any point during this operating sequence. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input.

3. 2. 284 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Unlock Model command.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. you must first unlock the model using this command. A warning form displays. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. Steps 1.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select the Annotate Model command. If you toggled Display to On. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. The Load Database process. Setup 285 . 10. however. 4. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. will prevent such duplication. 3. 2._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. The Annotate Element form displays. If you want to display the annotation in the model. Steps 1.

February 2003 286 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. modify. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. 287 . Runtime Setup Commands 11. based on the current active one-line type. and allows you to set new active parameters. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu._ _______________ 11. Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays.

Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. See Setup Commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. 288 .February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups.

Once you have deleted the override. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You can review and modify the values in this field. select the column value field and delete the blank character. Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. For example. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. select this field. then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. You can enter blank spaces into the design. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory. if you defined tray as your active one-line type._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. If blanks exist for a field. which is based on the current active one-line type. Otherwise. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. the field remains null. page 294 ). Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. To change the values associated with a one-line type. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. 289 . To delete an override on a reference database attribute. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. You can only review the information in this field. and key in the new value. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form.

Once you place an override key on an element. but cannot delete it. You can only review the information in this field. select the *. 290 . You can only review the information in this column. then the column value has a corresponding codelist.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. The key field is updated. If an * displays in the List column. Where the toggle is On. and key in a new value. If you delete the value in this field. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. If you can only view (read) the column value. the key specified in the user element is used. the Default key is used. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. To change the displayed value. you can modify it. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. it becomes an override key to the reference database. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. the Access column displays a R/W. the value will display in the design where you place it. then it will display an R. If no key exists in the user element. To display the codelist. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. select the field. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. the field remains null. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. Otherwise. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form.

To add values from the displayed specification table rows. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. and then select Confirm (√). 291 . then a second form containing all matching rows displays. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. select the row you want. If you select Cancel (X). If more than one row matches the criteria. Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. which automatically activates it.

Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. 292 . > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. representing a single character. the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator is a wild card. 2. 3. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator is a wild card. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. representing zero or more characters. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. If you do not enter another operator. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

_ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. displayed. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. When you load the project database. Runtime 293 . optionally. these values are loaded into the project database.

Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. From the list. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. select the one-line type you want to make active. The Active One Line Type form displays. The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. 3. 294 . page 260 ). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. The one-line type you selected highlights. Steps 1.February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. 2.

The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Set Active System 11. whereas subsystems do not. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. page 258 ). The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. 295 . Project Rules cannot be assigned. the subsystems are all unselected. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. you can select a new active system from the set of those available. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Using the Set Active System form. While this button is depressed. When a new active system is selected. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. then a Project Rule can be assigned. Steps 1. select the *. press the Subsystem button. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. 296 . To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. To access the list of subsystems. When a row is selected. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. Select the Set Active System command. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. 4. The Active System form displays. To clear the Project Rule. 3. 2. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. If an * displays.

and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. 297 . Cutback . All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. Sketch .Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation.Sketches standard straights and fittings. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. regardless of the settings on this form.Propagates straight sections and fittings. Smooth . Rough .Propagates straight sections only. Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. see The Drawing Process. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. Eden . Propagation Setup 11.Propagates straight sections. radius. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. For additional information about propagation. page 108 .

Steps 1. regardless of the status of this toggle. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. Also. Select the Propagation Setup command. elements are automatically propagated when placed. 298 . that affect the graphical display of the propagation. any changes you make to an element. 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 3. When the toggle is set to Off. If you set the toggle to On. The Propagation Setup form displays. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. automatic propagation is disabled. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. part verification will be performed. Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . like editing the size.

Runtime View — Displays the active view. When a level has its display turned on. select the appropriate level number. their corresponding one-line types. Set Active Levels 11. To change the active view. and the levels on which they display. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. 299 . They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. the button appears to be depressed. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. 1 . or select the field. and key in a new value. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. select a value from the list.

February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. The Levels form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. Select the Set Active Levels command. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 300 . Steps 1. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3.

location and radius of each bend in the run. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. a fitting within a run. then run information is displayed. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. Return to step 2. 2. Return to step 2._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. Select the Display Element Information command. 301 . 3. Steps 1. and coordinate location of ends and bends. This information includes: segment lengths. If either a one-line. or an RCP within a run is selected. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. Display Element Information 11. a straight section. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected.

February 2003 302 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. In addition. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. Utilities Commands 12. sector/word position) you provide. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element._ _______________ 12. 303 .

or shows the coordinate system currently active._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file. 304 .

see Precision Input Form. Using the Utilities Commands Before Using These Commands 12. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Using the Utilities Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Utilities You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. 305 . for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID. Group Workflow In general. you can use these commands throughout the design session. you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID. for example). page 119 .

February 2003 Toggle Construction Display On/Off This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Therefore. select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle. Press <R> to exit the command. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. 306 . When construction display is On. this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements. Once you have exited the command. 2. 3. the view number displays in a prompt.

Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. 3 (line). 3. but is not added to a working set. 307 . the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. the element highlights. Steps 1. If the position is valid. The file will display in a form on the screen. 4. Utilities You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. Press <Esc> to exit. 6 (shape). — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. Go to Step 4. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell). If you do not specify a pathname for the file. 4 (line string). or 17 (text). 7 (text node). and both are relative to 1. Highlight Element by Sector/Word Highlight Sector/Word With Filename 12. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. If the element is part of a complex element._ _______________ Highlight Element by Sector/Word This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. 2. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG. the entire complex element highlights. allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight.

Return to Step 1. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. 7. Return to Step 1. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. Go to Step 6. select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. 308 . 6. After you select a line. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename.) Go to Step 4.February 2003 5.

Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. Highlight ASID ID With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element.err. Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. 2. 12. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. you can specify the file pro. For example. 309 . The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID._ _______________ Highlight Element by ASID ID Highlight Element by ASID ID This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. the raceway element highlights. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command. but is not added to the working set. The Select hilite asid mode form displays. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. Utilities Steps 1. If you do not specify a pathname for a file. The file will display in a form on the screen. to see where propagation errors exist in your design file. allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. If the ASID ID you specify is valid. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID.

4. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Go to step 6._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. 310 . — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. Return to step 2. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. a file display form displays. 5. 6.February 2003 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. Return to step 1. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode.

_ _______________ Select a line that contains an ASID ID. Utilities 8. Go to step 8. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted. 311 . Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. Return to step 2. Return to step 3.) Go to step 5. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. 9. 12. select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. 7. Return to step 1. Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Highlight Element by ASID ID After you select a line. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode.

the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory. allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. If the entity and mslink are valid. Go to Step 4.February 2003 Highlight Element by Link This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. or 17 (text). 5. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values. If the element is part of a complex element. The file will display in a form on the screen. but is not added to a working set. 312 . the entire complex element highlights. 2. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. Highlight Link With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. 3. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. the element highlights. 4 (line string). Steps 1. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 7 (text node). The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell). 3 (line). If you do not specify a pathname for the file. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. 4. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. 6 (shape). Select the Highlight Element By Link command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Point to view for window Highlight Element by Link 12.) Go to Step 4. Utilities Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. Go to Step 6. 313 . Return to Step 1. select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. 7. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. Return to Step 1. 6. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified._ _______________ After you select a line.

and the pro. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file.err file displays. select the error(s) from the list. The pro. 2. and select Confirm (√). Go to step 2. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file. 3.February 2003 Highlight Propagation Errors This command highlights propagation errors in the design file. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command. Continue highlighting propagation errors. Steps 1.err form redisplays. Review the errors listed on the form. 314 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

12. 2. Utilities 315 . The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. and accept it with a <D>. Display Sector/Word Value Steps 1. of an identified element. Select the Display Sector/Word command. in the MicroStation command window._ _______________ Display Sector/Word Value This command displays the sector and word position. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for.

The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. 2. of an identified element. Steps 1. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. in the MicroStation command window. 316 .February 2003 Display Element Type and ASID ID This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID). Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command.

of an identified element. 2. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. Display Link Steps 1._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. Utilities 317 . Select the Display Link command. 12. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. in the MicroStation command window. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. you can locate elements. 2. The identified element highlights. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — OR — Exit the command. Steps 1. 318 . and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. page 119. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. route one-lines. reset a command action. The precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify.

The system prompts you to identify another element. 319 . Display System and One-Line Type 12. 4. and subsystems (if applicable). — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ 3. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system prompts you to identify another element. Go to step 2. system. Continue identifying elements in the design file. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to step 2.

The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. 320 . Activate Plant Coordinate System. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. Instead. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. If you desire to change the coordinate system._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project.

13. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. 321 . Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database._ _______________ 13. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar.

February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section. and screen prompts vary for each command. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck. 322 . Operating Information Because the operating sequence. command key-ins. Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command.

Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. 13. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 324 . The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The columns are optional for Load Database. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

select Confirm (√). Steps 2. 13. the message above displays. and the process begins. where you may review the errors. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. When you are finished completing the input information. the message above displays. Enter error and output filenames. Database 3. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 325 ._ _______________ Steps 1. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. and is displayed automatically to the screen. The message file is created on every run of the process. Accept will load database. or accept the displayed defaults. When complete. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. The Load database screen displays. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. Select Load database command.

The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). When you process a report. To change the output filename.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports.) 326 . allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. an input screen displays. These reports report on the project and reference databases. You must load the project database before running any reports. select the output file box and key in a new name. see Create Project for the directory structure. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. Key in any information that is not supplied by default. All reports are kept in the /reports directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can change the name of the output file or error file. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. See Reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.

2. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. 4. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. the new file will overwrite that file. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . Select the Report command. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Select the report you want to run from the list. Report Steps 1. 3. 13. For instance. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. you should name the output files yourself._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 direction. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 328 .

_ _______________
Rule Checks

Rule Checks

This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. You must load the project database before running any rule checks.

Overview
13. Database
This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. For more detailed information about each rule check, see Reports, page 545 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. When you process a rule check, an input screen displays.

The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields, or change that information according to your specifications.

329

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project, you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously, the new file will destroy the previously created file. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name.

Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Rule command. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report.

330

_ _______________
14. Raceway Processes
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections:

Raceway Processes

Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the design filename you specify. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s ../rway/dgn directory. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file, with the name you specify, that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.

14. EERWAY Processes

331

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Load Database
This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. 1. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading, using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. Thus, you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information, using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

2.

This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin, and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.

one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight

ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev*

332

_ _______________
str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent***

Load Database

Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

* The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway.

Steps
1. Select Load database from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Load database screen displays.

14. EERWAY Processes

2.

Enter drawing name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

333

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground, Background, and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections. When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen, where you may review the errors. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process, and is displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

334

_ _______________
Batch File Option
The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Setup an rway.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.bat:

Batch File Option

SET SET SET SET SET SET

MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\

14. EERWAY Processes

335

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Design
This process unloads a design from a relational database, based on the design filename you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database, nor will it delete information from user-defined tables.

Steps
1. Select Unload from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Design database screen displays.

2.

Enter design name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

3.

Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields.

336

_ _______________
4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Design

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

14. EERWAY Processes

337

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Sheet
This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block, and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing, since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. If the sheet name contains blanks, it must be specified in single quotes.

Steps
1. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Sheet database screen displays.

2. 3.

Key in a sheet name. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names.

338

_ _______________
The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Sheet

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.

14. EERWAY Processes

You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

339

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Cleanup Database
This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. For example, information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted, but for some reason was not removed from the database. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), onelines, and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. It then makes a list of all valid drawings, and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. This process will not delete drawings. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing.

Steps
1. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu, and select Confirm (√). The Cleanup Database screen displays.

2.

Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults.

340

the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. 4._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. The process begins. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. the message above displays.msg file. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. the message above displays. Confirm your selections. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 14. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. The . Select the desired operating mode. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. select Confirm (√). It will display mostly zeroes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. page 64 ). You may choose between Foreground. Background. The . 341 . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. When complete.err file. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. is created. 3.

Enter design name. 2. 342 .February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. the process writes the file to <current_project>. Steps 1. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). 3.prj/rway/dgn/<filename.env>. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. Upon completion. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection.

the above message displays. select the Confirm button (√). Otherwise. The process begins.err file. The . you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. 5. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review.prj/rway/tmp directory. Otherwise.prj/rway/tmp directory. the above message displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 14. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ 4. background. When complete. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. lists all errors that occurred during the process. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. Select the desired operating mode.msg file. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). The . displays all processing information. You may choose between foreground. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. EERWAY Processes 343 . Confirm your selections. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen.

344 . Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway.env>. Upon completion. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. Enter design name. 3. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. the process writes the file to <current_project>. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). Key in a name for the envelope file. Steps 1.

displays all processing information. The process begins. Confirm your selections. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select the Confirm button (√). you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. the above message displays. lists all errors that occurred during the process. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. the above message displays. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. EERWAY Processes 345 ._ _______________ 5. You may choose between foreground. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. 14. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. When complete. background.prj/rway/tmp directory. Otherwise. The . Select the desired operating mode. 6. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The .err file.msg file. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. Otherwise.prj/rway/tmp directory. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes).

February 2003 346 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . Each Eden process is described in a separate section. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. manipulate the Eden symbol library. page 59 . For information about accessing the processes. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. Eden Processes 347 . as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library.EErc file in your home directory. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. then edit the . The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. and edit the Eden symbol file. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide._ _______________ 15. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. 15.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file. 348 .

select the field. select the field. To change the displayed default library name. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. select the field. 349 . See Eden Symbol Generation. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. and key in a new option._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol source file. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. and key in a new library name. 15. To change the displayed option. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). To enter the symbol source file. To change the displayed error filename. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. and key in a filename.

msg file. and the Eden process begins. The . Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. contains any output from the process. You can choose between foreground. the message above displays. see Output. You can view either file on the screen. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. background. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the desired operating mode. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The . see EDEN. 2. The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. Confirm your selections. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√). When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√).err file. 4. page 89. 3. 350 . and batch operating modes. page 67 . For information about operating modes. the above message displays. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.February 2003 Steps 1.

For information about the path to the symbol source file. and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. To change the displayed library name. Eden Processes 351 ._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. and key in the name. and key in a new filename. 15. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To enter the symbol name. To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. select the field.

Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. Select the desired operating mode. The . see Output. and batch operating modes.msg file. background. When you have completed the input information. contains any output from the process. 2. The . 3. 352 . page 89. select Confirm (√). For information about operating modes. You can view either file on the screen. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. and the Eden process begins. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the above message displays. the message above displays.February 2003 Steps 1.err file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can choose between foreground. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. see EDEN. The . 4. Confirm your selections. page 67 .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed output filename. select the field._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. select the field. and key in a new library name. To change the displayed error filename. 15. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed library name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename. Eden Processes 353 . List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent.

When you have completed the input information. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. You can view either file on the screen. Select the desired operating mode. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 4. select Confirm (√).err file. the above message displays. and batch operating modes.msg file. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√).February 2003 Steps 1. page 89.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the Eden process begins. background. page 67 . The . see EDEN. 2. The . Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. contains any output from the process. the message above displays. For information about operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 3. see Output. Confirm your selections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 354 . You can choose between foreground. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.

To change the displayed error filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. select the field. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. To change the displayed output filename. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. 15. Steps 1. see EDEN. 355 . The List EDEN User Functions form displays. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. 2. background. To change the displayed library name. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. You can choose between foreground. For information about the path to the symbol library. and batch operating modes. select the field. and key in a new filename. 3. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and select Confirm (√). page 67 . and key in a new filename._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. For information about operating modes.

err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). see Output._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. contains any output from the process. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen. The . 356 .err file. The . and the list will display.msg file. Confirm your selections. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the message above displays. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. page 89.February 2003 4. the above message displays.

Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. To change the displayed output filename. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. 357 . To enter a library name. and key in a name. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. 15. For information about the path to the symbol library. and select Confirm (√). select the field. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. Eden Processes Steps 1. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. To enter a library name. and key in a new filename._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a name. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. 2. select the field.

The . 4. the above message displays. Select the desired operating mode. see EDEN. You can choose between foreground. page 89. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 358 . page 67 . select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. You can view either file on the screen. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen.February 2003 3. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. see Output._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . background. The .err file. and batch operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Confirm your selections. contains any output from the process. For information about operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The .msg file. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the message above displays. When you have completed the input information.

background. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. page 67 ._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. and key in a new filename. and select Confirm (√). The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. 15. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. select the field. To change the displayed library name. 359 . see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol library. see EDEN. and key in a new filename. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. You can choose between foreground. Eden Processes 2. Select the desired operating mode. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. For information about operating modes. 3. and batch operating modes. select the field. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. To change the displayed output filename. Steps 1.

The . select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. the above message displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. page 89. Confirm your selections. contains any output from the process. When you have completed the input information. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the message above displays. see Output._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 4. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The . 360 .msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen. The .

For information about the path to the symbol library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in the name. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. and key in a new filename. select the field. To enter the symbol name. and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed library name. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. Eden Processes 361 . To change the displayed output filename. then edit the . To change the displayed error filename. for example). The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. select the field. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. select the field. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. select the field. 15. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library.

see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√).msg file. contains any output from the process. 362 .err file. Confirm your selections. the message above displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. see EDEN. and batch operating modes. page 67 . Select the desired operating mode. background.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the above message displays. select Confirm (√). The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The . You can choose between foreground. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 4. You can view either file on the screen. For information about operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and the Eden process begins. When you have completed the input information. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. 2. page 89.February 2003 Steps 1. The . The .

see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. select the field. and key in the name. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. 15. select the field. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. Eden Processes 363 . For information about the path to the symbol library. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. To change the displayed error filename. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. select the field. and key in a new filename. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. and key in a new filename. To enter the user function name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. then edit the . and key in a new library name.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. for example).

Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. the message above displays. 4. background. lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. When you have completed the input information. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 364 . 2. and select Confirm (√). see EDEN. Select the desired operating mode. Confirm your selections.err file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. page 67 . You can choose between foreground. select Confirm (√).February 2003 Steps 1. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. For information about operating modes. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . and batch operating modes. The . and the Eden process begins.

_ _______________
Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

Extract EDEN User Function From Library

15. Eden Processes

365

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Edit EDEN Symbol File
This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. It is only available on a graphics terminal.

Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To change the displayed editor, select the field, and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. To enter a symbol filename, select the field, and key in a symbol file name. For information about the path to the symbol source file, see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

366

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list, and select Confirm (√). The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes. For information about operating modes, see EDEN, page 67 . 4. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information, select Confirm (√), and the Eden process begins.

Steps

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

15. Eden Processes

367

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

368

_ _______________
16. Integrated Commands
The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules, providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes, review the PDS clashes in a model, create a window containing a specific element, and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS, not when running standalone EE Raceway.

Integrated Commands

The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar, then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu.

16. Integrated Commands

369

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Using the Integrated Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Before Using These Commands
Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection, and must have an existing clash in the design area.

Group Workflow
There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

Operating Information
See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

370

_ _______________
16.1 Review PDS Attributes
The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments), you need to display construction type elements. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command.

Review PDS Attributes

Parameters
Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.

16. Integrated Commands

371

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.2

Reference PDS Model
The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.

Parameters
Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.

372

_ _______________
Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

Reference PDS Model

16. Integrated Commands

373

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.3

Window to Named PDS Item
The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files.

Options
Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. You can select: Piping, Equipment, PE HVAC, or Raceway. Depending on which discipline you select, the item attributes you can search for changes. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label, Line ID, Inspection Iso ID, Piping Component Number, Pipe Tag, Instrument Component Number, or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag, One Line Tag, Drop Point Tag, or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting.

374

_ _______________
16.4 Review PDS Clash
The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes.

Review PDS Clash

Parameters
Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows; or, select the field and key in a marker number.

16. Integrated Commands

375

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. Click Select View then select the view you want to update.

376

Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. Asid <numeric value>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. 377 . Asid <numeric value>.

Asid <numeric value>. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Recovery: Change element annotation. 378 . If the fitting is a specification-driven part. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. Recovery: Change element annotation.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Recovery: None. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. 379 . Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . "$". the name input already exists in the attached cell library.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. If the problem persists. Cannot Place Cross Section. digits. and replace the one-line.". or ". Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. If the problem persists. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. Cannot Place Cross Section. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Invalid sys on oneline. call Intergraph support. 380 . Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. and replace the one-line. call Intergraph support.

Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file.ins is not in the proper location._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Recovery: None. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. 381 . Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file.

Please export this variable. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not get one line type from user data. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. 382 . Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Could not get one line type part table from user data.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ.

Recovery: None. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. 383 . Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Recovery: There are various recoveries. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: None. based on cause of error. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file.

Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Could not write to TCB. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Make sure the key is correct.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. 384 . status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. If the key does not exist. insert it into the reference database. The database is case-dependent. Recovery: Enter correct filename. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file.

or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. change the spec. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. 385 . Recovery: None. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Recovery: Enter design filename._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting.

Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. 386 . Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions.

Recovery: Enter a new asid number.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Reason: File pro._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Change access to design file. 387 . Error closing propagation log file. Propagation status may not be recorded. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Enter a new value. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid.err did not close properly. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Make sure the pro.

Recovery: Add entries to reference database.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. 388 . Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database.

Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation.EErc file. Reason: Internal error. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. 389 . Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Recovery: Correct entry.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. 390 .February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation.

Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. and one element. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Error opening design file <string>. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. 391 . Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. one datum point.

sql file. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. 392 . Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref.

sql file. Recovery: Add privileges to database. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. 393 . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names.

Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Recovery: Add privilege. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. 394 . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privilege to database. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Error saving symbology .

Recovery: Add privilege to database. A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Reason: Internal error. 395 . Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Key in a value. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Recovery: Call Intergraph support._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Recovery: None. Recovery: Fix other errors.

Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. at a cross. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. extension or transition of the fitting. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>.February 2003 File <string> exists. Recovery: Modify the radius._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. change the spec. 396 . so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. For example. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: An illegal angle exists.

Recovery: Fatal error. Try to exit and re-enter the software. 397 . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. a form could not be displayed by the software._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Possible memory allocation problem. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product.

Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted./config/assign file. 398 . Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell.

Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. <numeric value>. 399 . Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Recovery: Key in another asid id._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. For example. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting.

Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Enter an integer value. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. If it is a cable entry. Invalid key in .quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Recovery: Key in another value. 400 . quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. For example.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range.

Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Recovery: Enter a valid response. Invalid RCP ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. vertex <numeric value>. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. 401 . Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database.

Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. 402 . Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element.

Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. RC. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. and place the element or RCP.or RB in the justification field. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. or RB. Recovery: Fix other problems. RT. LC. 403 . Recovery: Delete all but one title block. Must be LT._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. CT. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. .. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Recovery: Enter LT. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. LB. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area.. CC. LC. CB.

Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. 404 . Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables.February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name.cel)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file.

C for the cross section type. Recovery: Key in another name. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. B. 405 . Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. or C in the active specification. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. B. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>.

No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Populate the database with parts._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. 406 . Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file.

A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Recovery: Populate the database. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. 407 . One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line.

Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Recovery: Select another option. 408 . Recovery: None. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element.February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted.

Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Recovery: Enter schema name. no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Select failed. 409 . RCP)._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. three-line. title block. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file.

410 . Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Recovery: Enter sheet name. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Change sheet name. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7.

Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Recovery: None. therefore. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. 411 . snap to the angle. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. cannot be edited._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. A: Error Messages Title block placed . Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. 412 ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: If necessary. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Change the title block annotation.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database.

Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. you must key in a group name._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Recovery: Key in the desired group name. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. 413 . A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation.

February 2003 414 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cmds contains the rway. It attaches the panel menu.cmd file contains the alias. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. 415 . Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility.cmd file and customizing menus. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. You can modify or disable this function through the file._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file. Appendix I: rway. rule checks.cmds file. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes. B: System/App Mgmt. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias.cmd file as it is delivered. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify. Appendix H: alias. reports. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them.February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process. 416 .

Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. ee_dimension_1 real.unl files and database tables. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the . For detailed information about editing your . Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt. 417 . Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. ee_dimension_2 real. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. and rway. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform). ee_out_width real. alias.cmd. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. ee_units integer not null. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. ee_out_ht_diam real not null. To change the form design.EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). 1. ee_extension real.

ee_tl_qual integer. ee_symbol char(6). You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. char(20). real. char(40) ). or you can add the data to your vendor. char(6). ee_tl_subtype integer. 3. ee_part char(20).unl file. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. ee_spec2_key char(28).unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway.unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. All delivered . create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key). ee_part_key char(28) not null. char(28) not null. Create a <one-line_type>_spec. For sample files. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). 2. grant all on trench_spec to public. create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key).unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . ee_weight real. create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key).February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. 418 . grant all on trench_part to public. ee_angle real. ee_spec_key char(28). ee_description char(40) ). Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. real.unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor).

Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. 1. For information about codelists. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. INSERT INTO tray_part. 8. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec. For detailed information about editing your . Customizing 5. 9.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref.unl file. Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. 6. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref.unl file.unl file. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database.cmd file. see the appendix entitled EE Databases.unl files to the rwayref. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. 7. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. 419 .unl files and database tables. B: System/App Mgmt._ _______________ Appendix B: 4.unl" DELIMITER "|".

4. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. Add the newly-created <special fitting>. real. char(20). grant all on transit to public.cmd file. 420 . For basic information about creating Eden symbols. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table.unl" DELIMITER "|". real.unl file. 7. 2. 5.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key). char(6). char(28) not null.February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. For a sample special fitting .unl file. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. Create a <special fitting>. Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database. refer to the pullbox. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). char(40) ). INSERT INTO pullbox. 3.unl file to the rwayref. char(20).unl file. real not null. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). 6. or you add the data to your tlt. real. or you can insert records in the vendor.

Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). or by inserting a record in the mscatref. For information about codelists. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. B: System/App Mgmt. 421 . Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. You cannot change this name. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. 10. or by inserting a record in the manprt. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref.unl file. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. or by inserting a record in the mscolref. Use a standard text editor to modify the error. 8. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. 11. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database.unl file. To the right of each = is the message itself. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory.msg files. which you can modify. In these files. 9.unl file.

They include Microstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries. "am=ustn.sb1"). and EE Raceway-specific variables. 422 . The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols. File containing EE Raceway symbols. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. Used as a pointer to application programs.sb" (i. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig.h1". Sets the directory for the on-line Help files.men. This variable will override the user preferences setting. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms. or "am=n. Sets the directory for temporary files.ndx) files. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu.e. EE Nucleus.cs".February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway. Directory for the message files. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. "am=n. This directory is also the location of user command index (. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables. Defines the path to the on-line Help files.

423 . Reference Database sql file. Schema name for project database. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. Reference Database cmd file. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. Directory path for data files. it must be set to "A". Directory path for the Eden symbol library. Directory path and project database name. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. Directory path for data files. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. User-defined project database cmd file. Default remote path for archive/restore. Directory path for seed files. User-defined reference database sql file. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. Default username for archive/restore. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Directory path for message files. B: System/App Mgmt. Project Database cmd file. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product.EErc file. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. A variable used for ORACLE databases. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. Filename for the Eden symbol library. Directory path for the RIS product. User-defined reference database cmd file. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. Default nodename for archive/restore. User-defined project database sql file. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Project Database sql file.

February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for EE symbol file. EE reference database server process. Schema name for reference database. Directory path for EE forms. 424 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Directory path for ORACLE executables. Directory path for INGRES executables. Filename of EE symbol file. Data files for DB Access Support.

Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. Processes needed in the procedures above. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). that supports it. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. such as symbol and part information. The reference database is identified when you enter a project. they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. C: EE Databases 425 . the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. and Ingres. (For those familiar with EDES. On-line Informix. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. a generic relational database interface. RIS. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. that is. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. Oracle. Thus.

you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways.) 426 . in fact. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product. which you define. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. to attach to an SQL-type database.

and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. local or remote. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. After you have created an empty database. ownerships. that was created using RIS Schema Manager. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. To do so. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema.) This process will create the risschema definition file. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. C: EE Databases 427 . you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product. using the risschema_mgr process._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. For more information about the risschema file. page 50).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must have at least: — an SQL (. To run it outside of the EE Environment.sql file that has a different structure than the original . the process loads it only if the table is empty. — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given . you can also include: — a command (.cmd) file that defines which . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu.unl files that are listed in the . The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match.February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.sql file. This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q .sql file.cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema. you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg. and then key in the command line syntax for the process. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .sql file. If you want to load a schema with default information. the process will: — add new tables listed in the . — AND — — the corresponding .sql) file which contains the table and column structure.cmd files.sql file] [-c .sql file -c .sql file. If Update schema is used with a .unl files to load into which tables.unl file(s) which contain default information.cmd file] schema name -v -q . Where a table lacks a unique index. 428 . — load those tables having a unique index with data from the .

created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option. with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. C: EE Databases 429 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.

You can establish default attributes for drawings. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. RCP. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. including. tray_spec. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. Reporting. For example. the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. the drawing. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. raceway connect points (RCPs). 430 . for example. fittings. 2. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. one-lines. RCPs. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. 3. if the reference schema is custom-built. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. But if the project schema is custom-built. straights. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Reference Schema . the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. drop points. Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. All specification information is carried in the reference database. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. one-lines. and tray_part tables. and so forth) during a design session. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. and equipment pointers. one-line. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema.

Text annotation overrides any default values. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema .General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer. Text annotation overrides any default values. C: EE Databases 431 . Text annotation overrides any default values. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form.

the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight. You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow.blank 2 .approved 6 . but you must not remove any of the existing rows.approved 3 .approved 10 . You can add new approval status rows to this table.February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database. Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values. and one_line tables in the project database. Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database. During loads of the project database.approved 7 . The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist.approved 4 . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 . the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values.approved 11 .approved 9 . fitting. For example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .approved 8 .approved 5 .not approved 432 .

You can add new drawing types to this table. COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types. 433 . but you must not remove the existing row. You must not add or remove to this table._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. The table contains the index_column column. The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project. The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . ee_part. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. The table also contains the ee_spec. The table contains the index_column column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. ee_ol.

The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. The system table contains the system_num column. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. nor should you modify the index_column values. You can add. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. You must not add or remove rows from this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. remove.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . nor should you modify the index_column values. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. The table contains the index_column column.

You must not add or remove rows from the table. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. nor should you modify the index_column values._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. The table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You must not add or remove rows from the table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 .

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 . The unit table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove rows from this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. The vendor table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. You can add vendors as necessary to this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . but do not remove the rows delivered with the product. nor should you modify the index_column values.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. You may add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 .February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column. 441 . The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 .

3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) 443 . 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase.

glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase.non-metallic covering) Moisture. cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. non-metallic covering) 444 . 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. Moisture-. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. flame.February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos. flame. You may add or remove rows from this table. Heat. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase.non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column.and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant.

& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-.and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene Codelists Yes-No Codelist Table The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. Moisture. Moisture.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant. You must not add or remove rows from this table. Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-.and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat. Moisture. (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description C: EE Databases The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes 445 .and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant._ _______________ Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-. Moisture.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . at least.180.180 90. compares the number of intersection one-lines.180 90 90. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number. zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90.180. the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. the one-line type. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number.270 90. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. If found. You can add. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number.270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY 446 . remove. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. The software.February 2003 Fitting Environment Rules The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway.

270 Non-Planar Angle = 90 C: EE Databases 447 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Fitting Environment Rules Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90. 180.

The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing.February 2003 Project Schema . its one-lines. 448 . RCPs. Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database.General Description The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. and three-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Updating Reference Schemas Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database. These fields require a full path to the files. you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database. since this is a schema name. Updating a Project Schema Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Given the schema name. not a database name. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. Additionally. since this is a schema name. No paths are required. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. views. if one exists. INGRES). RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. using the Update project schema option. and to grant permissions within the schema. No paths are required. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema._ _______________ Appendix C: Updating Schemas Updating Schemas Before you can update (that is. load with EE tables and default data) a schema. not a database name. ORACLE. you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX. if one exists. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. Given the schema name. If you select multiple applications. C: EE Databases Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. Sql and Cmd Files 449 . The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. using the Update reference schema option.

you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/. then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files.February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. and to grant permissions within the schema.EErc file to be your project schema name. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. If you select multiple applications. since this will be the default name when you enter the project. Schema Names When creating your RIS schemas. 450 . However. you should use the same name as your project. views. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

sql" file in order to modify a schema.unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty.unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete.sql file for the one_line table.sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. simply include the necessary changes in the . 5. Creates new table according to "create table" statement. 451 . 2. the following actions take place: 1. Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". You can modify the size of a column. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. 4.sql file. the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored. C: EE Databases If rows exist in the updated table. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition. 3. these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. then the . For example. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. Saves rows from existing table. then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema. The SQL statements in the . you would lose any data that may have been on that column. for example. from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer". If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10). for example). You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement._ _______________ Appendix C: Modifying the Reference Schema Modifying the Reference Schema You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). 1. The . 2. columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the . To modify the database schema before schema creation. you need only to modify the ". any new columns that are added will be blank in each row.sql" file. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ". The .sql file before Update schema is executed. 4.sql file are the input to the Update schema process. columns are added into the . but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. Therefore. 3. If a table does not have a unique index. Therefore. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema.

All existing . FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt. Edit the desired .unl). There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. 4. part data. To see which . These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and codelist values. The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1. look at the command (. INSERT INTO ol_type. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table.unl" DELIMITER "|".unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr.unl files from being loaded.sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the .unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1| 452 .unl file.exe). the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.g. 2. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the . These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. The . the RDBMS’s interactive query product. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file: FILE "olt.February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *.exe) 2.unl file must not be null for that column. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt. such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS.unl files as defined in the command file. In this case the "olt. or ORACLE’s sqlplus. The delimiter is one character long. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .unl files must be loaded for proper product execution. 3.unl files into the database.unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field.cmd) file you will be using. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl files are being loaded into the reference database. Certain columns are defined in the . or INGRES’s SQL.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. — OR — You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1.

cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref. "TRAY" is the index_value column value. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database. The following example demonstrates how to load a new . 3. separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table. Create a new file in the current directory. 2.unl.unl" DELIMITER "|"._ _______________ Appendix C: In this example.unl file. "240" is the ee_spec_table column.unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. 453 . INSERT INTO tray_spec. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog. etc. "1" is the index_column value.cmd. you can edit this file.unl" file you would like to add additional entries. naming it catalog. For example: Modifying the Reference Schema 1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV| C: EE Databases 4. 1. If in the "olt. When you have finished editing the .

An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. approv_status This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and so forth.February 2003 EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema. not approved. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". away_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. 454 . ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. approved.

ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes C: EE Databases ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. away_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material. 455 . this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software.

Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. cardinal This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left. 456 . bottom left. center left. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. or C._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The only valid entries are: A.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. B. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. and so forth).

ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. material: the column used to define the conduit body material. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. 457 . weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY.

ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. 458 . Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. for example NEC 1990.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit.

ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. C: EE Databases 459 . Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software.

ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. 460 . ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the conduit material. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.

ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The only valid entries are: A. 461 . or C.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. B. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. The associated shapes are shown below.

Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. 462 .February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. material: the column used to define the ductbank material.

The only valid entries are: A. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. B. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. The associated shapes are shown below. 463 . ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. or C. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. 464 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description.

index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. 465 .

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. config: the cable configuration of the cable. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. 466 . Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics.

Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. where the information crosses products. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. If not. 467 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. In some entries. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique.

February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system. Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 468 .

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. 469 . ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage.

vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. 470 . item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number.

This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. In general. 471 . It must exactly match the name of the desired table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. pullbox). Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body.

A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. and DBAccess all support this table. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. MicroStation 32. 472 . mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. RISRPT. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. index_column: a column name that. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. the work_mode value is set to zero. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. In general. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. column_name: the name of a column in the database. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. 473 . index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. It must exactly match the column name in the database. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). if not NULL.

ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type. conduit. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description. 474 .February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. and so forth). wireway. ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.

add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. 475 . panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag.

ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. location: this column contains the location. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. 476 . prj_name: this column contains the project name. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. ee_description:this column contains the key description. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software.

478 . ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag.February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. 479 . Zero if no check is to be performed.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Zero if no check is to be performed. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Zero if no check is to be performed.

Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual.February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. cross. elbow. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. wye. and so forth). reducer. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. flexible. 480 . and so forth)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . horizontal. bendable. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description.

ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. 481 .

ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. 482 . ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.

ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. C: EE Databases 483 . Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification.

catalog: the column that contains catalog information. 484 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or C. The associated shapes are shown below.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. The only valid entries are: A. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. B. wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 485 . ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification.

ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. The only valid entries are: A. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. 486 . ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. B._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . material: the column used to define the wireway material. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. The associated shapes are shown below. or C. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the revision number._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors. cable number. 487 . An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. and cable number ID. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. cabsch_spec This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. cable_numb: the column containing the area number. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. 488 . drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number.February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type.

Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. conduit number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number. drawing_numb can have duplicate values. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to. and conduit number ID. 489 . for example power. conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description cndsch_spec This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. control. and so forth.

February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. 490 . undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size.

used by all EE products. contains general information about each EE design file. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description drawing This table. C: EE Databases sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database. 491 . drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path. drop_point This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table._ _______________ Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule. 492 . Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point. and cable number number ID. duct_fill This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line.February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. cable number. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable.

tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. envelope This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_system This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing. 493 . Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema.

ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. 494 . ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting.February 2003 fitting This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table.

ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). C: EE Databases fit_to_sys This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype._ _______________ Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. 495 . ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier.

It must exactly match the name of the desired table. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535.February 2003 mscatalog This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. 496 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32.

C: EE Databases 497 . access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. the work_mode value is set to zero. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. column_name: the name of a column in the database. This column can also be thought of as a filter. Currently. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. there are no EE processors using this table. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. It must exactly match the column name in the database.

498 . ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. one_line This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule.February 2003 ol_to_sys This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. C: EE Databases 499 . ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification.

ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 .February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. project This table contains specification information for the project. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information.

ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. location: the column containing location. Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. 501 . base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process).

pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database).February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. 502 . Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp.

ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. 503 . ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section.

ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. material: the column containing the straight section material. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. 504 .

ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 505 . Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. tag: the column that contains the support tag. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

unl file. The system will attach a .unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs. If you intend to add records to an existing . You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway.sav before running the process._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. If you answer n to the prompt. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product. copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec.sav file. and conduit. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name.unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. and will then write all records to that file. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. wireway. airway.sav file.unl file or to create a new . SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory. the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified . D: Specs 507 .unl and <one-line type>_spec. key in SPEC at the command prompt. Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n). These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox.sav extension to the specified table name. The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray. The process will then write all records to this . This process allows you to add records to an existing . To initiate the process. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes.unl file easily and efficiently. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements.

press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary.sav file and redisplays the column names. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C.sav file back to the corresponding . For subsequent records. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your . 508 . Copy the .sav file. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. Once you enter the final value for the displayed table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .unl file to keep the records you have added. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record. the system writes the information to the .February 2003 The system processes the information.

Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.unl Files Sample .unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 .unl Files The following are examples of ._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample .unl files you will load into your reference database tables. tray_spec.

unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. the outside height dimension in sub-units. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. the spec table contains all specifications. tray_spec and tray_part. As described previously. 510 . the fitting extension.unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. the . while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification.February 2003 tray_part._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. a dimension variable used by Eden. the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. the outside width dimension in sub-units. For information about running Update Reference Schema. see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. a dimension variable used by Eden.

the tray part description._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the tray specification key. the unique tray specification key. the tray material. the fitting bend radius. the fitting turn angle. the secondary tray specification key for reducers.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the Eden symbol. the index_column value from the tl_qual table. * For information about the codelist values. the tray specification description. the cross section symbol. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the construction type. the unique tray part key. the weight per unit length of the run. the tray part catalog number. D: Specs 511 . the tray part weight. Sample . the index_column value from the tl_subtype table.

90.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 .45.60.45. and Adjustable 90.60.90.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30. and Adjustable 30. and Adjustable 30.60.45.90._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. etc.). fittings. However. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives. pullboxes.). and special parts. use the delivered Eden processes._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. and special parts (conduit bodies. The delivered symbol library is called eden. For additional information about the Eden symbol language. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. To review or modify the symbols in this library. etc. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. fittings. draw_arc.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden.

height . val5.or. 0.eq. angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2. radius. ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. 0.or. val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. height. extension.eq. val1. angle . 0. val4.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 . val2.0 .February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file.0 . angle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . with or without extensions. val3.eq.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid .

(Point[3]. 0. 0. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. Point[i]._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. val3. 0 ) Endif 515 . Point[0]. Point[0]. radius. 0. -halfwid. halfwid. val6. Point[0]. Point[0]. 0. -val1. 0. (Point[2].0. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. -val4. (Point[4]. Point[ORG]. Point[0]. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. halfwid. 0 ) 0. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. -val1. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0. Point[0] ) Point[0]. Point[0]. Point[0]. 0 ) 0. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. NUMPTS. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99.0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. 0. 0. 0 ) then Do i = 1. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. 0. 0. Point[BND2]. 0. Point[0]. 0 ) 0. val2. val5. -halfwid. height. 0. Point[0]. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. NUMPTS. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0. 0. height.ne.-extension. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2]. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2.

Point[0]. 0 ) Do i = 1. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. 0. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . 0. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[0]. (Point[3]. 0. height. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0. halfwid. 0 ) 0. extension. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. 1. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i].Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. When defining parts in the reference database. -halfwid. NUMPTS. Point[0]. (Point[2]. halfwid. Point[i]. -angle. For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. (Point[4].Point[2]. Point[0]. 0 ) Do i = 1. NUMPTS. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . -halfwid. 0 ) 0. 516 .Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. 0. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. 0 ) 0. Point[1]. NUMPTS. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS.ne. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99.Point[BND2]. height.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1].

ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table . the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP... ... they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string. see the table immediately following this description... Spec Table .. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution.. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .. width.ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table .ee_dimension_2 . Dimension 25 Spec Table .ee_extension Spec Table .._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow.. . ... If the fitting has extensions... Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden..... For specification-driven parts.ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table ... ..ee_radius Spec Table .....ee_dimension_1 Spec Table .... The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation.. In general.. while other critical points are defined relative to the origin.. The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.. . Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow..ee_extension 517 ..ee_out_wid Spec Table . extension.. .... 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .... and radius from the global array DIMENSION... It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement.. EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol.ee_out_wid Spec Table . EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database. For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions. height. The symbol derives the values for angle..............ee_transition Spec Table ...

.......... Dimension 60 From Part Table ....February 2003 54 55 56 57 ..... .. .... Spec Table .ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 .... ...... ...... .....ee_dimension_2 ........ . . .. ......ee_dimension_1 Part Table ......_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ........ ...ee_dimension_60 518 . ....ee_transition Spec Table ............. Dimension 25 Spec Table ......ee_dimension_2 ....... ... Part Table .ee_radius Spec Table . 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .... 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ................ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ..........

519 . By default._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. It identifies those files you can modify.

February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. /usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 .. The following files exist under the . Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory. The product may reside on any file system. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and then invokes the EE environment. 521 .txt – File containing release notices. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes.def – product definition file. INFORMIX.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. EE Nucleus. — . — EEnotice.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. etc. The files are grouped by directory. — product. problems. comments. — remove._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. and EE WPD. — legend – copyright notice file. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables.

sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. — print. — mount – supports less disk installation. Also kills stray processes. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — reeprj – remote environment process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and product variables. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. — mscrecol.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — eeprj – environment process. — risql – EE reporting utility. — eemgr – system manager environment process. This file can be edited. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. INFORMIX variables. — create_db – create database process. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. 522 . — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script.

— dba* files – DB Access files. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms. — eepsp. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . doc/ – directory that contains documentation.txt – less disk information.txt – EE project setup information. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — lessd.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager.

/usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files.def – product definition file. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. unload drawing.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. These files can be modified. comments.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. — load – processor to load the project database. etc. — menu. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. — product. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. The files are grouped by directory. — remove. and clean database processes. problems. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. 527 .

dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. and cell library. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. – – seed. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library. Also contains . menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — process.hp – help pointer file. — rule_chk.lib – the Eden symbol library file. function key menu. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.February 2003 — eden. and any design files delivered with the product. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.s – help source file. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help.dat – controls rule check report management. — help_rway. 528 . Attaches the function bar menu. — report.dat – controls standard report management. You can supply additional menu files. — rway.dat – controls Eden processes. available cell libraries. This may be customized. — help_rway. — mstr_rway. — mstr_rway. This may be customized.dat – controls process management.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. — eden. msseed. Sample .s – master help source file.

tmp/ – Holds any temporary files.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rwaypnl.ace)and compiled (.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation. — annot_form – form file for annotation.bar – bar menu source file. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files.ace and an . These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. — command. — alias. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. — rway_prj. — status. report/ – Contains the source (. — rway.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field.msg – message file containing messages for status field. There is an . – merge_pnl – panel menu file. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. The software requires this directory. 529 .msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. prompting messages.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. and logo. — error. — rway. — rwaybar. — prompt. The source files may be edited by the user. This file can be extended.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. — rway_ref.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file.arc file for each report listed below.pnl – panel menu source file.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.

February 2003 530 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

dat process.dat manager. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. rule_chk.dat control the scrolling lists for the Process.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.Switch | . .dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process. and Output. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file.dat.dat. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. # # eden. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Path. ..dat. You may want to write your own processes. Report.Default.bat -c \ | Enter library name . reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered.-O.%EDEN_LIB%... and print._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden. Report.Path. respectively.dat 13. Rule..dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden. Rule.. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process. \ | Enter symbol source file .\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert). report.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. The manager.dat report. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. and Output menus.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.dat print. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. # 531 .1 0. eden.Default.dat rule_chk.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.

.%EDEN_LIB%.bat -l \ | Enter library name .bat -u \ | Enter library name . # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. \ | Merge from library name . Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -s \ | Enter library name ..%EDEN_LIB%. 532 ..February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%. # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor.._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..bat -e \ n | Enter library name . # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. \ | Enter symbol name .%EDEN_LIB%.. \ a t | Enter symbol name .. \ \ | Enter symbol name .... d # e n # .bat -C \ # | Enter library name ...%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%.bat -d\ | Enter library name .. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..notepad.... # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name.. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -m \ | Merge into library name .bat -eu \ b | Enter library name .

# # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 .. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.%RWAY_DGN%.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.exe \ | Enter design name. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.%RWAY_DGN%.Default. This was # done to handle schema passwords. The password will # have to be handled accordingly. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both). # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character..%RWAY_DGN%.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory. . # So.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. . # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.1 0.Default.exe -s \ | Enter sheet._ _______________ Appendix G: process.dat process. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.%RWAY_DGN%. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.Path..Switch | .dat 13..dat #ident "@(#)data:process.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form.. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.exe \ | Enter design name.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.exe \ | Enter design name.-f \ | Enter envelope name.Path.exe \ | Enter one design name.. # # process. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.

cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema. # The second field is the command field.%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .) as the delimeter._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.February 2003 report.dat 7.. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. . . # # They are: # Prompt. # # report.1 0.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema.Default | .dat #ident "@(#)data:report.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.

Default | .dat rule_chk.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. # The second field is the command field.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file. # # rule_chk. .dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk.1 0.dat 13. ._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk..

SWITCH. # # print. # (The path is not relevant). A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .DEFAULT.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print.default. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list.path and switch.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name... # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name. # The command can be any command to output a file.PATH.dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory.dat 21. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt...1 0... This field should be used to pass # information to the command. # The first column of comment line must be #.February 2003 print. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 . The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT.0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX.

Path.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file. _ r # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted p # t # .cmd \ |Enter schema name.dat #ident "@(#)env:manager. -s e # # m #Compress database ..INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database .0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. G: Customizing Environment 537 . # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ x | Enter schema name.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory.dat manager. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. ....1 0. # # manager.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt.. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character._ _______________ Appendix G: manager.Default. .. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.dat 21.Default.Path.Switch | .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 538 .

cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias.cmd file.cmd file. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias. the format of such an entry. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below.cmd file Appendix H alias. The example in the alias. You can use any text editor to modify the file. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias. H: alias.1 0. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software. The alias. If you were to add this example to the alias. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign._ _______________ Appendix H: alias. For example. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element.cmd file.cmd.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 . The alias.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias. a sample entry.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg. You do not need to add entries to the alias.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 .

_ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file 541 .cmd file H: alias.

February 2003 542 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cmds 543 . You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature._ _______________ Appendix I: rway. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway. add mmenus ee_rway:menu.cmd The file rway.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus. If you do not want the rway. The rway.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m.cmd file to be executed. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus.cmd Appendix I rway.amm m.cmd file may also be edited by the user.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway..ammfile.pr I: rway. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command..

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 544 .

The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. layout. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. both. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . either local or remote. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor... Any RISsupported relational database. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. This is the name of any current RIS schema. i. Created through DB Access. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. Report templates created through DB Access. in some cases. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. and print conditions._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. is supported. the Project Data View Reference Guide. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. Project Dataview. the reference database and.e.

[wtr_p5] When you create a template. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0].) 546 .... A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access. third. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". Certain variables may be exported..) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". the "-o" option can be used.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template. and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used.. and use a schema from the schema list.. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0". The first parameter is read into wtr_p0. Thus.rpt" added to the end. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5). * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i. default file name that they write to. with a ". since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed. etc. If you wish to override this name. "select value_a from table_b where. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . etc. second. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates.e..) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through.

load_date. Information Output: Drawing. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. Selects the desired columns from those tables. sheet.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ref_db. dba_rpt . 3. drawing_type.the RIS process._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. 2. J: Reports 547 . Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. Project Database drwlst (RIS) . found in $EE_NUC/bin. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. filename.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. Formats information into readable form. This file: Selects the desired database tables. and sorts them by sheet name.

3. description Fitting._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .the RIS process. ee_tl_subtype. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. ee_out_ht_diam. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_ol_type. ee_out_width. Project Database mto_rpt . 2. ee_out_width. dba_rpt . This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. Formats information into readable form. ee_ol_type.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Information Output: System. ee_tl_length. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. system_name Straight. ee_out_ht_diam.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. ee_tl_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. found in $EE_NUC/bin. 548 . ee_part.

2. ee_part.the RIS process. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. Information Output: Straight. ee_ol_type. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template. J: Reports 549 . This file: Selects the desired database tables. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_out_width. ee_ol_type. Formats information into readable form._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. description Fitting. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_out_ht_diam. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. ee_tl_length. Project Database rway_bom . dba_rpt . ee_tl_type. ee_tl_subtype.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. 3. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width.

234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. For instance. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. 550 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form.

3. ee_out_ht_diam. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. found in $EE_NUC/bin. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. This file: Selects the desired database tables. J: Reports 551 . ee_tl_subtype. description Fitting. Formats information into readable form. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1.the RIS process. ee_out_width. ee_part. Project Database rway_bom_vol . ee_ol_type. 2. ee_ol_type. ee_tl_type. dba_rpt . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template.

ee_out_width. ee_out_ht_diam. Project Database blank_ids . This file: Selects the desired database tables. 2. ee_out_width.the RIS process. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_ol_type. 3. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_tl_type. Formats information into readable form. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. description Fitting. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_part. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_tl_subtype. 552 . system_name Straight. Information Output: System. Selects the desired columns from those tables. dba_rpt . ee_tl_length.

RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. then information about that schema is displayed. and dropping RIS schemas. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. RIS Schema Manager terminates._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. any active secondary forms are erased. If you select one of the schemas in the list. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. 553 . When you select Cancel (X). changing. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating. When you select Reset. If you select any of the buttons. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a read only form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. It reads information about existing schemas.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. with the exception of the Schema Name field. 554 .

information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. 3. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. 2. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. This form creates new RIS schemas. select Run to create the schema._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. Select the Display Databases button. 555 . and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. If you select one of the databases. Once you have entered all necessary information. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. select one of the Network Protocol fields. Key in all information in the input fields. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. input fields for that information display. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. If the selected database type requires additional information.

either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. the user password. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. To modify the schema node. To modify the user password. and the schema node. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. To select the schema to be altered. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. 556 . Selecting Run drops the schema. When you have entered all necessary information. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. To select a schema to drop. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. you need only to enter the new password. When you select one of these options.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. select Run to alter the schema.

views. and clears the list. Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. 557 . If the selected schema requires a password. The column position. This form consists of a list of all the tables. Drop Table. column name. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. and Alter Table) will accept input. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. column type. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr.

Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. There is the usual set. In Drop Column Mode. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. column definitions can be modified. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Select Reset to clear the form. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. in the upper right corner of the form. 558 . and Modify Column. select Run to create the table. which behaves as expected. In Modify Column Mode. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. This form has two sets of Control buttons. Drop Column. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. new columns can be added to the table definition. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. In Insert Column Mode. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. Then there is the second set. columns can be dropped from the table definition. Once the table definition is complete.

Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears the form. It can only append one new column to an existing table. Selecting Run drops the table. select Run to alter the table. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. K: RIS Schema Mgr. Selecting Reset clears the form. 559 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Once the new column is defined. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form.

an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct. Additionally. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Selecting Reset clears the form. and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. 560 . Selecting Reset clears the form settings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off.February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network.

then the schema file is in use. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. L for LU6. A line separates entries. In these cases. Currently supported values are X for XNS. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. If the lock file does not exist. currently supported values are X for Informix. The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. D for DNP (DECnet). If there is no network address given. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. a unique key to identify the database The database type. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. If the filename is not a full pathname. T for TCP/IP. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. O for Oracle.2 The network address (must be an address.LCK extension. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. Although you can use multiple files. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. This file is the schema lock file. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. the lock file must be replaced manually. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. The values found in the create schema option clause. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. I for Ingres.

155 PROTOCOL= 562 . All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.2 and the default value is lu6.135. The valid value is lu6. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users.2. the other on the IBM. This value is case-sensitive.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs. one on the Clipper.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. This value is case-sensitive.142.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. the CICS transaction name. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. This value is case-sensitive. This value is case-sensitive. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses.142. This value is case-sensitive. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370.135. There are two logical units.

they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. Currently.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. All these entries are created by the create schema statement._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8. only the first protocol in the list will be used. This allows for additional protocols in the future.H:. If the file is corrupted or removed. 563 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 564 .

M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. if you are entering the environment for the first time. Once you have successfully entered your password._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. see Appendix N. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. To run EE Manager. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system. For detailed information on setting environment variables. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form.

It uses DB Access to query and edit tables.February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive. and update rows. delete rows._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 566 . In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary.

Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. or edit the value displayed in the field. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. delete. If no find criteria exist. which allow you to search the database. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. and functions which enable you to change._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. and insert a row or group of rows. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. 567 . The number on the button changes to reflect the row. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. To go directly to a certain row. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. These buttons include various Query functions. which shows the current find criteria. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. this command finds all rows in the current table. Release the mouse button to display the row.

You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. and Update Active fields. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. Multiple column searches are processed in order. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. When you are certain the data is correct.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. When you select Update Active. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. By default. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. As long as this command is active. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. Add Query columns. 568 . Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode.

_ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification. Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 570 .

Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee.cfg file. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu.cfg file to the list. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform. 571 . Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list.cfg is located. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. appears in the Descrip field. Double click on the EE Configure icon. 6. 4. Edit the entry in the Value field. To edit the values of other variables. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. 5. if any. When complete. The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. click on the Delete button. This same field can be used to add a new variable. 8. 572 . 3. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. The description. 2.cfg file.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. Steps 1. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. continue the same process as above.cfg file. 7. To delete the variable.

A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. Software designed to meet specific needs. and the keyboard. An attribute of a database table. created through NQS. it controls the message fields. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. or channel for moving requests. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. unlike system software which runs other software. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. A group of columns defines a table in a database. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. In network operations. See also path name and relative path name._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. All network operations (database. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. and then manipulated as individual elements. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. character client column command confirm button 573 . the menus. NFS. A queue.

bus errors. for example. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Y. or erase. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. though this is not required. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. the most common of which are memory violations. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. or processed by a specific program. and Z axes of the design cube. eliminate. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . place elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. Y. Also known as key-in field. and user-generated quit signals. a component onto which a user cannot log. disk drive. destroy. tape drive. or Z axis.0. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. A separating mark or space. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example.0. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. to accept previously selected elements. that is. A nonaddressable component of a network. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. To remove. interpreted. and floppy disk. whereby points are located by traversing the X. and to select commands from forms and menus. identify and accept elements. illegal instructions. Normally. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters.

An object (project. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. a relational database table. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A relational database management system supported by RIS. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. element. a field. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. A pictorial representation or image. or a checklist. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. including the file name. See also relative path name. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. that responds to information. difference in longitude. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. drawing. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.) of interest about which information is stored. and so forth. See interference envelope. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. such as a button. When selected. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. or positive.

The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. to which you can snap.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . or it can mean the connected system. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. including vertices. the Prompt field. A graphic representation or schema. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. A name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. or alias. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. It is divided into the Command Status field. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. A point on an element. and the Key-in field. Network File System. the Current Command field. Also known as a data entry field. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local.

See also path name and absolute path name. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. y. job specifications. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. and z-axes intersect. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . See also absolute path name and relative path name. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. graphics symbology. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. Network Queuing System. commodity libraries. In coordinate geometry. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. but is level. to change the angular orientation. vendor’s catalog data. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. label descriptions. Reference Database. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. A relational database management system supported by RIS. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. and is three-dimensional. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. The sequence of directories leading to a file. the point where the x. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. To turn. having no elevations or depressions. or indicate a specific point in the design file. report formats and other information of a similar manner._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping.

and querying relational databases. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. One collection of column values for a table.z). All network operations (database. including color. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. to change between two alternatives. The display style of an element. See also active depth. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. generally represented as a line. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. that are stored in an attribute. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. and weight. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. The defined area of vision on a screen. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. stay on the disk until they are called for.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. Language developed by IBM for creating. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. NFS. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory.y. dash-dot. and z axes. y. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. Views are created with their own x. The x. either entered by the user or determined by the software. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. modifying. style. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. The software uses virtual memory to store data. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. the software can perform processing more quickly. Data. and so forth. In network operations. solid. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. A name that provides access to an account on the system. A collection of data for quick reference. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. To switch. This means that unneeded files and data.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary N: EE Configure 579 .

February 2003 580 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

234 list column 179. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 235 source column 179. 415. 327. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 109. 234 model 285 one-line 178.cmd 529. 235 display toggle 179. 234 override button 180._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 550 bin/ 521. 234. 235 override keys 179. 234 select button 180. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179.

278. 275. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180. 279 equipment pointer 274. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522.February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 276 model 271 library 269.

425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 527 database 321. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 278. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 279 equipment pointer 274._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428. 275.

279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179.dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 . 278. 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277.

82.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 80._ _______________ ee.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 84. 87. 79. 276 keys 431 place 144 error. 78. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 81. 86. 275. 83. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274.

332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 357. 264. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 342. 359. 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 234. 271 eden symbol 353. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323.hp 528 help_rway.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway.

sh 522 msg/ 523. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 ._ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu.cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol.

179._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46.hp 528 mstr_rway. 48. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146.February 2003 msseed. 235 keys 115.dgn 528 mstr_rway. 52. 234. 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 .s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180.

344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53.def 521. 297 sketch 113.dat 522._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521. 567 process.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113. 55. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521. 527 product.dat 528. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 .

sym 529 rway.dat 528.cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.pnl 529 rwaypnl. 534 reports 117. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 327.tbl 529 rway_ref. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 . 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521.dat 528.sym 529 rway_prj._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cmd file 543 rway.

233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 .msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27.

48. 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27. 449 project 52.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 415. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 .unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428. 109. 449 reference 55. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 52._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 55 processing 53. 55.

_ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 327. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 . 550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 594 .

00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.02. .

............................................................ 634 EE Raceway File Structure............................................................................ 627 Annotate Model................................................. 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ......................................... 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3) ......................2)........ 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9............... 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) ................................................................................................................... 625 Move Group...... 611 Mirror Element ................................................ 619 Rotate Copy Group ............................................................ 617 Rotate Group........................................... 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9.........4)................................................................ 607 Rotate Element............................................................................................................................................................. 633 EE Nucleus File Structure ........................................................................................................ 599 Utilities ..................................................................................................................................... 609 Rotate Copy Element.................. 598 Load Reference Schema ............... 597 Modeling.................................................................................................................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ........ 637 596 ............................................................................................................. 623 Mirror Copy Group.............................................................................. 621 Mirror Group ................................................... 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16..................................................................................................................................................................................... 613 Mirror Copy Element.......................................................2) ............................................................................................

the EE Raceway Environment form displays. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. reporting. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. EDEN symbols. and rule checks. 597 .PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment.

The selected model displays in MicroStation. Select a model from the list. 598 . Select a design area from the list. Click Accept. 4.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. Click Accept. The Raceway Designer form displays. 3. 2. Steps 1.

CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which .cmd files.sql file. Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project.sql file that has a different structure from the original .sql file. SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. the process loads it only if the table is empty.unl files to load into which tables.unl files that are listed in the . 599 . or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given . If you update the schema with a . — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition.sql file.Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. If a table lacks a unique index. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the .sql file. keeping column data where column names match. SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.

CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables. 600 .unl files to load into which tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .

Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. 601 . and Rule commands. Report. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. EDEN.

then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. The following information has been modified: Rotate.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. 602 . You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text.1 version of the document). Rotate Copy. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. Mirror.

This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Palette. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. 603 . or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section.

604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.

then selecting Palette. then selecting Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. 605 .

Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. 606 . then selecting Palette.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette.

Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. copy. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Mirror. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. reviews. The following information has been modified: Rotate. annotation. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. within the design file. 607 . Rotate Copy. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. and three-lines. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements.1 version of the document). and delete specified elements. Annotate Element — Places. including RCPs.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. to review or edit element annotation. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. then selecting Palette. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. onelines. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. You can use individual commands to move. then selecting Modify Element Commands. and so forth). three-lines.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. and elements associated with it. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. 608 . Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. from the design file. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file.

For detailed information about precision input. All associated annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. three-line fittings. accept input. Using the form. and annotation. see Precision Input Form.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. To change the angle. and equipment pointers will also be moved. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. three-line fittings. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. you can locate elements. If a one-line is rotated. RCPs. All associated annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. reject input. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. drop points. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. If an RCP is rotated. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. You can use this command to move one-lines. reset a command action. 609 . equipment pointers. route one-lines. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP.

The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The element rotates to the specified position. Click Accept. 610 . 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Specify Rotation form displays. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. 5. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. Select the Rotate Element command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 4.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The system highlights the specified element. Steps 1. 3. the system displays the message Element not found.

The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. reset a command action. At any point during this operating sequence. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. 611 . North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To change the angle. reject input. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. Click Accept. 612 . 4. 3. the system displays the message Element not found. 5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. The Specify Rotation form displays. The element copy displays at the specified position. Select the Rotate Copy Element command. The system highlights the specified element. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. 2.

RCPs. and exit a command. Secondary. To change the displayed axis. three-line fittings. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. To change the displayed angle. At any point during this operating sequence. drop points. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. accept input. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. see Precision Input Form. If an RCP is rotated. All associated annotation. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. All associated annotation.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. route one-lines. reset a command action. three-line fittings. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. you can locate elements. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. and equipment pointers will also be moved. For detailed information about precision input. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. Using the form. select the field and type a new angle. and annotation. To reset a 613 . all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. equipment pointers. If a one-line is mirrored. and equipment pointers will also be moved. toggle among the three axes (Primary. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Click Accept. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. 2. 614 . The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Select the Mirror Element command. The Mirror Element precision input form displays. 3.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 4. The Orient Mirror form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The element rotates to the specified position. Steps 1. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. The system highlights the specified element. the system displays the message Element not found. 5.

Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. Steps 1. accept input. select the field and type a new angle. and exit a command. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. reset a command action. 615 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Secondary. Using the form. To change the displayed axis. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. To change the displayed angle. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Select the Mirror Copy Element command.

Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. 3. 5. 616 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. the system displays the message Element not found. Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. Click Accept.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 4. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The system highlights the specified element. The Orient Mirror form displays. The element copy displays at the specified position. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Specify the point around which to mirror the element.

Rotate Copy. and delete elements of specified groups. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. then selecting Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. annotation. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. and Move Group commands See the following text for details. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. copy.1 version of the document). The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and so forth). Mirror Copy.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. three-lines. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. and to review or edit element annotation. 617 . The following information has been modified: Rotate. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Mirror.

Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. reviews. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. 618 . Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.

619 . all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. and annotation. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. see Precision Input Form. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. three-line fittings. accept input. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. RCPs. you can locate elements. equipment pointers. Using the form. reject input. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. If an RCP is rotated. three-line fittings. All associated annotation. If a one-line is rotated. To change the angle. drop points. route one-lines. All associated annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and equipment pointers will also be moved. You can use this command to move one-lines. and exit a command. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point.

you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. The system highlights the specified group. 2. 4. 620 . The group rotates to the specified position. If you do not locate an acceptable group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Click Accept. For groups in Single Element mode. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 5. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. Select the Rotate Group command. Steps 1.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 3. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. The Specify Rotation form displays. the system displays the message Group not found.

Select the Rotate Copy Group command. To change the angle. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. For detailed information about precision input.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. and exit a command. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. 621 . The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. Using the form. Steps 1. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. see Precision Input Form.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. 4. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. For groups in Single Element mode. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 2. 5. Click Accept. 3. The Specify Rotation form displays. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. The group copy displays at the specified position. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. the system displays the message Group not found. The system highlights the specified group. 622 . If you do not locate an acceptable group.

and equipment pointers will also be moved. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. and equipment pointers will also be moved. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a 623 . If an RCP is rotated. select the field and type a new angle. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. Using the form. If one-lines are mirrored. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. reset a command action. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and exit a command. three-line fittings. To change the displayed axis. To change the displayed angle. Secondary. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. All associated annotation. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. All associated annotation. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. three-line fittings. see Precision Input Form.

Specify the point about which to mirror the group. 4. Click Accept. For groups in Single Element mode. 2. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. The group moves to the specified position. Steps 1. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 624 . the system displays the message Group not found.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The system highlights the specified group. Select the Mirror Group command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The Orient Mirror form displays. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 5. 3.

About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. reject input. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. Using the form. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. toggle among the three axes (Primary. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the displayed axis. you can locate elements. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. Steps 1. select the field and type a new angle. Secondary. To change the displayed angle. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. route one-lines. 625 . The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. accept input.

The Orient Mirror form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Specify the point around which to mirror the group. 626 . The group copy displays at the specified position. Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable group. 4. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 3. 5. The system highlights the specified group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. For groups in Single Element mode. the system displays the message Group not found. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode.

The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 4. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Select the Move Group command. Using the form. accept input. 627 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. The Move Group precision input form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 3. 2. The group moves to the specified position. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. you can locate elements. The system highlights the specified group. the system displays the message Group not found. reset a command action.

The Annotate Element form displays. 285 in the PDS 7. —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details.1 version of the document). 2. If you want to display the annotation in the model. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project.dgn file name of the raceway model. Steps 1. If the user does not specify a sheet number. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . will prevent such duplication. 4. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. 3. however. The Load Database process. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. If you toggled Display to On. 628 . Select the Annotate Model command.

1 version of the document). This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. click Attach. then. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. 629 . The following information has been modified: Display. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. click Attach. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. Snap. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. then. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area.

Attach – Attaches a reference model. Snap. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Snap. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. 630 .

Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. pds_north. and EE_SCHEMA. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg. panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing.exe file See the following text for details. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. Before running the upgrade utility.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east.2.1 version of the document). Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 . PROJECT_LOCATION. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database.

632 . pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.

By default. • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. It identifies those files you can modify. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. 633 .EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. It also describes the contents of directories and some files.

The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation.\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 . EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.. The product may reside on any file system. The following files exist under the .

comments. and EE Raceway. — license. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — dba_shell. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt. and then invokes the EE environment. — EEnotice. — create_db – create database process. INFORMIX.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. — remove. bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. EE Nucleus. 635 . eenuc — readme. problems.txt– copyright notice file.txt – File containing release notices.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. — . The files are grouped by directory.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. etc.

— Eemgr.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files. — dba* files – DB Access files.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — eeprj. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. — manager. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib).dat – ASCII file for output file management.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database. 636 . — print.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. — eeqpr. — mscrecol. doc – directory that contains documentation.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — reeprj – remote environment process.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable. share sym – contains EE symbol files. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. — menu_shel.exe – environment process. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures.

\eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

problems. comments. etc. 638 .txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. The files are grouped by directory. eerway — readme.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.

unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. available cell libraries. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema. — process. Sample . These files can be modified. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process.— remove.dat – controls standard report management.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. — eden.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. dgn – Contains the seed file directory. Also contains .dat – controls process management. and clean database processes. and any design files delivered with the product. unload drawing.dat – controls rule check report management. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. — rule_chk. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. 639 . — rway_schma.dat – controls Eden processes. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. — load – processor to load the project database. — report.

dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view. 640 .

These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. — alias.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. 641 .lib – the Eden symbol library file.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — error. — msseed. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.— seed – contains the available seed design files. — eden. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — prompt. This file can be extended.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — seed. This may be customized. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. eden – contains the Eden symbol library. This may be customized. — command.

tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. — status. — rwaypnl.msg – message file containing messages for status field. There is an . — rwaybar. 642 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. report – Contains the source (. prompting messages. tmp – Holds any temporary files.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. — rway_ref. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. The software requires this directory. The source files may be edited by the user. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. and logo.ace)and compiled (.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.arc file for each report listed below.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. This directory also contains the available precision input forms.ace and an .

601 643 . 624 mirror copy. 626 Mirror Element command. 638 element mirror. 604 design. 610 Rotate Group command. 634 EE Nucleus. 628 rotate. 629 EE file structure. 610. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 618 move. 608 modify group. 626 modify. 620 schema load reference. 605 modify element. 638 group mirror. 635 Raceway file structure. 608 rotate copy. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 629 Modify Element commands. 629 Annotate Model command. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 618 runtime setup. 622 Rotate Element command. 624 model annotate. 614 mirror copy.Index annotate model. 602 model commands. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 607 setup. 616 modify. 606. 602 Intergrated Commands. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 612 file structure EE. 602 EERway. 618 Move Group command. 607 modify. 620 rotate copy. 614 Mirror Group command. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 605 EE Raceway. 634 Nucleus file structure. 604. 630 reference schema load. 635 EE Raceway. 608 Modify Group commands. 606 PDS reference model. 599 utilities. 628 palettes bar commands. 616 Mirror Copy Group command.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful